JP6728270B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) and a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a big hit based on the fact that a game ball is won at the starting opening, and the symbols are variably displayed on the display device so that the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner according to the lottery result. When the result is a big hit, a gaming machine is known in which a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big hit game state.

In addition, the decorative design is variably displayed as an effect image on a display device such as a liquid crystal, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the lottery result. When the lottery result is a big hit, the display concerned is displayed. There is a game machine that displays a decorative symbol in a predetermined combination on a device to notify that the lottery result is a big hit (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-115255, A

However, there is room for further improvement in such a pattern display mode.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a pattern display mode is devised.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention adopts the following configurations. The gaming machine, based on the satisfaction of the start condition, obtains the lottery information about the winning, and the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the lottery information, and the variation of the decorative symbol based on the satisfaction of the start condition, There is a plurality of modes in the display effect in which the decorative design is provided with a decorative design variation unit that shows the result of the lottery when the variation of the decorative design is stopped, and the decorative design is cyclically displayed with a predetermined time as one cycle. It is possible to execute any of the display effects of the display effects having the plurality of aspects during a specific period during the change of the decorative pattern, and any of the display effects of the display effects having the plurality of aspects. After the variation of the decorative design is stopped by displaying the combination of the non-winning designs by the decorative design after executing, the special period for hiding the decorative design under the condition that the start condition is not satisfied Can be generated, it is possible to execute any one of the display effects of the display effects having the plurality of modes again when the special period in which the decoration symbol is hidden is ended , and the decoration pattern in executable special effect in the particular period in which a non-display, said to allow run some expectation effect different expectation effect for said per executing the variation of the decorative pattern, not with the per symbol the variation of the decorative symbol combination is displayed is that you are hiding the decorative pattern under after the decorative pattern after stopping was not displayed in the special period, it does not satisfy the initiation condition status It is characterized in that a combination of the decorative patterns which does not win is displayed when the special period ends.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is devised for the aspect of symbol display.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the front lower side. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front by disassembling each main member of the game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of a front constituent member and a game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel as viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning a prize mouth, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning a prize mouth in an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing portions of a starting opening unit and a side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st special winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from a left side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit from the front, (b) is the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit It is the perspective view which looked at from the back. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a second attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. It is explanatory drawing which expanded the right part in the game area in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of the game board in the state where the door frame is made transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back behind production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back behind production unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration with a back back decoration board. 142A is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 142B is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear movable decoration body and was seen from back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiating plate and the back rear decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with a broken line. (A) is a front view showing a part of a decorative body in a back and rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of a decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) FIG. 8A is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 160 is an exploded view showing an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front surface of a back back movable decoration and shows the relationship between a decoration by a decoration and a decoration sheet, and a light guide radiation plate and a back and back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a light guide radiation board and a back decoration board in a site|part of 1st LED in a cross section, (b) shows 2nd LED on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the site|part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and 1st LED of a back rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands a part of back decoration board and shows with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back-rear decoration board, (b) is a rear view of a back-rear decoration board. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body in a back-and-back movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a back-rear movable ornament of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable ornament of Fig. 142, and (b) is a back-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing composition of in a section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing composition of a back back movable decoration of a fourth embodiment in section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower left production unit and back lower right production unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is seen the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit from behind. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the inside-behind-the-under-elevation mechanism of the inside-behind-the-stage production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the inside-behind-the-under-elevation mechanism of the inside-behind-the-stage production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle effect unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering of the lower back middle decorating body unit by the lower back middle raising/lowering mechanism in a lower back inside production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body of the back lower middle decoration body unit in a back bottom middle effect production unit from a front, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each and each detection sensor by a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement|positioning of LED of the lower back middle decoration body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back effect unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back effect unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up/down lifting decorative body unit in the back unit, which is disassembled and seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of the back side raising/lowering decorative body unit in a back side production unit from a front, (b) is a back side raising/lowering decoration in the state which moved the back side raising/lowering decorative body unit to an appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decorative substrate from the front in the state which moved the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit to the appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in an open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed one back front right ornamental unit in a back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-up rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effecting unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back-rear right effecting unit It is a front view of the game board showing the rear right rotating decorative body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position and the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is the front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit respectively from the closed state to the open state. The rear back movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergence position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergence position, the rear rear left rotatable decorative body of the rear rear left unit From the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit lifted from the lowered position It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure for main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure for interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for types of big hit, (C) is a type of small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure hit determination table used in the lottery process for hitting a universal figure, and (B) is a universal figure hit pattern table used in a determination process for the opening pattern when hitting a regular figure. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design fluctuation pattern decision processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design stop processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric auditors product opening process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. It is a transition diagram showing an example of a game state transition of the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a high-accuracy short time no big hit. It is an example of a timetable of a demo screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of volume control. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stand-up effect. It is an explanatory view showing another example of a stand-up effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when the promotion production in rise production is performed. (A) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. (B) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening without suspension and during execution of variation. (C) is a reservation color determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there is one reservation. (D) is a reservation color determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there are two reservations. (E) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there are three reservations. It is an example of a pending color determination table during change. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the suspension notice production by a suspension color change. (A) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. (B) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when a game ball wins the starting opening without holding and during variation execution. (C) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening with one hold. (D) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there are two holds. (E) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there are three holds. It is an example of a gacha coin holding color correspondence table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a gacha coin pending notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a reach collapse pseudo continuous production. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of reach design promotion production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect on a Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect on a Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a holding peep production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a state display cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a state display cycle effect are simultaneously executed. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production which uses the plural types of production design. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production which uses the plural types of production design. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production which uses the plural types of production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of replay production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of replay production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of replay production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which a holding cycle effect and a movable body effect are simultaneously executed.

Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A translucent flat plate-shaped decorative member provided with a decoration,
A transparent flat plate that is provided behind the decorative member and that can radiate light in the direction along the plate surface to the front within the plate thickness,
A plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate are mounted on the front surface, and a decorative member provided with a decorative substrate provided behind the radiating plate. It is characterized by being provided.

Here, the "decorative member" may be composed of one member, or may be composed of a plurality of members (for example, an embossed portion formed by three-dimensional relief). And a decorative sheet having a pattern).

The "decoration" of the decorative member includes "three-dimensional relief", "two-dimensional pattern", "three-dimensional relief and two-dimensional pattern", and the like. .. In addition, "decoration" means "decoration with a logo or characters that conform to the concept of a gaming machine," "decoration that has a character that conforms to the concept of a gaming machine," or "item that follows the concept of a gaming machine." "Decorations with", "Decorations with a scene in line with the game machine concept", and the like.

Further, as the "radiation plate", "a plate having a plurality of LED accommodating portions formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front and accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear", "plate within the plate thickness" "A plurality of reflection parts that reflect light in the direction along the surface to the front is provided on almost the entire surface", "A plurality of reflection parts that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front. What is partly possessed", and the like.

Further, examples of the “LED” mounted on the decorative substrate include “side view type LED”, “top view type LED mounted sideways”, and the like. Further, examples of the "LED" include "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "bicolor LED", and the like.

Further, as a configuration for irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, there are "a configuration for irradiating light from the inner surface of the hole penetrating the radiation plate into the thickness", "radiation plate". ``A structure that irradiates light into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the slit that is penetrated through and is open to the side surface side of the radiation plate'', "From the inner surface of the concave portion that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate" Examples of the configuration include a configuration of irradiating light into the plate thickness, and a configuration of irradiating light into the plate thickness from the side surface of the radiation plate.

Further, the "effect member" may be movable or may be fixed without being moved.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the game machine is provided with a light-transmissive flat plate-shaped decorative member, and a decorative member provided behind the decorative member, and the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. The front surface is mounted with a transparent flat plate that can radiate light in a forward direction, and a plurality of LEDs that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the plate. The decorative member provided on the rear side is provided.

As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate behind the decorative member and the radiation plate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate. The light radiated forward by the radiating plate and radiated forward from the radiating plate causes the light-transmitting decorative member provided with the decoration to be illuminated and decorated. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiating plate is reflected forward within the plate thickness of the radiating plate to cause the decorative member to emit light. Compared with the conventional method in which the light is emitted toward the front, the distance from the front surface of the LED to the front of the radiation plate can be increased, and the light from the LED can be diffused widely to spread the light from the LED. Can be emitted forward from. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED can be diffused widely and it is possible to suppress the appearance of emitting light in a dot shape, so that the decorative member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated. It can be displayed neatly, entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest. In addition, in the effect member, since the decorative substrate is provided behind the flat plate-like decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for disposing the effect member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and by providing various effect members, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can further entertain the player.

Incidentally, the decorative member, a transparent and flat plate-like decorative body having an embossed portion that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional embossing, and is provided behind the decorative body, It is desirable that the decorative sheet is a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration. As a result, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is configured by the decorative body having the relief portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. By the lens effect of the relief of the relief portion, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided on the rear side. Therefore, since the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimension in the front-back direction) is reduced The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-described effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

Further, as described above, when the decorative member is configured by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the transparent decorative body is provided. Even if the decorative body is not colored, the decorative body can be made to appear colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet, and the cost for the decorative body can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the decoration of the ornamental body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, the game machine can be easily adapted to a model change or a design change. You can

Further, the decoration member may have a hologram portion which constitutes a part of the decoration and on which the pattern is displayed by the interference fringes of light. As a result, the light from the LED of the decorative substrate, the light from the other light emitting means provided in the gaming machine, the light in the game hall in which the gaming machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram portion, and the light is emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the hologram, the hologram can improve the appearance of the decoration and can attract the player's attention strongly, and the hologram can be used as a part of the decoration of the decoration member. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Furthermore, when the decoration member is provided with a hologram portion and then the decoration member is constituted by a decoration body and a decoration sheet, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decoration sheet. Is also good. As a result, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is configured by the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. It is possible to give the player a sense of depth and to show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest. Further, in this case, since the decoration sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, when the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. Is desirable. Thereby, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no frame on the outer circumference of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the pattern of the decorative sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be sufficiently exerted, and the effect of the effect member can attract the interest of the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. It is possible to make the pattern of the decorative sheet more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member formed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the thickness of the member can be reduced and the above-described operational effects can be realized.

Further, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) by the pattern of the decorative sheet. By making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member a decoration that is continuous with the effect member, it is possible to show a large decoration with a sense of unity to the player, and the visual impact on the player. It is possible to give attention to the game and to enjoy a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, it is desirable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED housing portions that are formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front and that house the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear. Thus, by housing the LEDs from the rear in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate, the rear surface of the radiating plate and the front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, and the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the thickness, and it is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine that achieves the above-described effects.

Further, when the radiation plate is provided with an LED accommodating portion that is capable of accommodating the LED and is recessed toward the front, it is possible to radiate light from the LED from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion to the plate thickness. In comparison with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in the part of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, the central part), the LED housing portion is provided at the part. By irradiating the light from the inner surface, it is possible to make the site emit light brightly, and the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, it is desirable that the LED of the decorative substrate is a side-view type that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate. Thus, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing the LED to emit light, light can be emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiation plate), and thus the light from the LED is directly emitted. Irradiation into the plate thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described operational effects can be easily achieved.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness, on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate. Accordingly, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be radiated forward from almost the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decoration member can be decorated with light emission, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In addition, when a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, light can be radiated to almost the entire decorative member, so that even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the light is reflected. It is not necessary to change the parts, and it is possible to easily provide a game machine that can easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member and can easily respond to changes in the model or design.

Furthermore, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative board on the rear surface of the decorative board. As a result, as compared with the case where electronic parts such as ICs and resistors other than LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative board, the radiation plate is provided by the height of the electronic parts from the board surface of the decorative board. The rear surface can be brought closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the thickness of the effect member can be further reduced.

Further, when electronic parts such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate as described above, when a side-view type LED is used as the LED, the LED is irradiated in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate. The light emitted from the LED can be prevented from being blocked by the electronic component, and the light emitted from the LED can be sufficiently distributed. Therefore, since no shadow can be produced by the electronic parts, the entire decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking luminescence effect. Can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in cost for the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The decorative member is
A transparent and flat ornamental body having an embossed portion that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by a three-dimensional relief.
It is provided on the rear side of the decorative body and is composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration."

Here, as the "decoration body", the embossed portion may be provided on both the front surface and the rear surface, or the embossed portion may be provided only on the front surface. The part may be provided only on the rear surface.

As the "decorative sheet", "one having a hologram portion in which a pattern is displayed by light interference fringes" and "one having a prism portion in which a myriad of minute prisms are formed" , “Having a lens portion in which a myriad of minute lenses are formed”, “having an opaque portion that makes the rear invisible”, and the like.

As for the relationship between the embossed portion of the decorative body and the design of the decorative sheet, the embossed portion and the design may be related to each other, or the embossed portion and the design may be completely unrelated.

According to the structure of the means 2, the decorative member is a transparent and flat plate-like decorative body having at least a part of the decoration and having a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief, A sheet-shaped decorative sheet that is provided and has a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration.

As a result, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is configured by the decorative body having the relief portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. By the lens effect of the relief of the relief portion, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided on the rear side. Therefore, since the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimension in the front-back direction) is reduced The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-described effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

Further, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decorative body. Further, since the decoration of the ornamental body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes and design changes.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The decorative member is
It has a hologram portion which constitutes a part of the decoration and on which a pattern is displayed by light interference fringes."

Here, examples of the “hologram part” include “transmission type hologram”, “rainbow hologram”, “Lipman hologram”, and the like. Further, the hologram portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the decoration member has the hologram portion that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays the pattern by the interference fringes of light.

As a result, the light from the LED of the decorative substrate, the light from the other light emitting means provided in the gaming machine, the light in the game hall in which the gaming machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram portion, and the light is emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the hologram, the hologram can improve the appearance of the decoration and can attract the player's attention strongly, and the hologram can be used as a part of the decoration of the decoration member. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 3,
"The hologram part is
"It constitutes at least a part of the pattern in the decorative sheet".

According to the construction of the means 4, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the design on the decorative sheet.

As a result, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is configured by the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. It is possible to give the player a sense of depth and to show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the decoration sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Means 5: In any one of the means 2 to 4,
"The decorative body has a flat rear surface, and
The decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body”.

By the way, in the prior art like patent document 1, the ornamental body provided in the foremost side in a production member has a flange-shaped part which protrudes backward over substantially the entire circumference. Therefore, when a sheet-shaped decoration sheet is provided behind the decoration body, the size of the outer circumference of the decoration sheet needs to be smaller than the size of the inner circumference of the flange-shaped portion of the decoration body. Since there is a flange part on the outer periphery of the pattern of the decorative sheet that can be seen through, it looks as if it is fitted in a small frame, and the decoration of the production member looks small and the decorative effect can be fully exerted. There is a risk of disappearing.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

Thereby, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no frame on the outer circumference of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the pattern of the decorative sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be sufficiently exerted, and the effect of the effect member can attract the interest of the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is made flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. Instead, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member including the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made thin and can realize the above-described effects.

Further, since it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) with the design of the decorative sheet, the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member is a decoration that is continuous with the effect member. By doing so, it is possible to show a large decoration with a sense of unity to the player, give an impact to the player's appearance and draw attention, and entertain the large decoration, which reduces the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The radiation plate is
It is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions for accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear”.

Here, the "LED housing portion" includes "a hole-shaped member penetrating the radiation plate in the front-rear direction", "a bottomed concave member that is recessed from the rear surface of the radiation plate toward the front", and "radiation member". A slit-shaped member that penetrates the plate in the front-rear direction and is open to the side surface".

According to the configuration of the means 6, the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front and accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear.

Thus, the radiation plate has the LED housing portion capable of housing the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate. Therefore, by housing the LED from the rear in the LED housing portion, It is possible to make the front surface of the decorative substrate as close as possible, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to reliably embody the gaming machine having the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the radiation plate has the LED housing portion that is recessed toward the front and can accommodate the LED, it is possible to radiate the light from the LED from the inner surface of the LED housing portion to the plate thickness. .. As a result, as compared with the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, the LED housing portion is provided at the portion (for example, the central portion) of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. By irradiating the interior surface with light, the site can be made to emit light brightly, and the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Means 7: In any one of the means 1 to 6,
"The LED is
It is a "side-view type" capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the LED of the decorative substrate is of a side-view type that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

Thus, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing the LED to emit light, light can be emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiation plate), and thus the light from the LED is directly emitted. Irradiation into the plate thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described operational effects can be easily achieved.

In the decorative board, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative board. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the side-view type LED, which emits light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate, from being blocked by the electronic components, and to fully deliver the light from the LED. You can make it happen. Therefore, since no shadow can be produced by the electronic parts, the entire decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking luminescence effect. Can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in cost for the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 7,
"The radiation plate is
The rear surface has substantially a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness on substantially the entire rear surface”.

Here, as the "reflecting portion", "a quadrangular pyramid shape", "a triangular pyramid shape", a "cone shape", a "pentroof (gable) shape", a "hemispherical shape", Etc. Further, the "reflecting portion" may be provided in a fixed pattern regardless of the position of the LED on the decoration substrate, or may be provided on a concentric circular arc centered on the corresponding LED.

According to the structure of the means 8, a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate.

Accordingly, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be radiated forward from almost the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decoration member can be decorated with light emission, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, and light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed. It is not necessary to change the reflection part, and it is possible to easily deal with the change of the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide the gaming machine that can easily cope with the model change, the design change, and the like.

Means 9: In the gaming machine,
"A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having a flat rear surface having an embossed portion that constitutes a part of decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief, and is provided behind the decorative body. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration and a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by light interference fringes and having the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, A transparent plate-shaped decorative member composed of
A plurality of LED accommodating portions provided on the rear side of the decorative member so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front side, and substantially the entire rear surface to reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front. Having a plurality of reflecting portions, a transparent flat plate-like radiation plate capable of radiating forward light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting portions,
A plurality of side-view type LEDs, which are housed in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate from the rear and are capable of irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate, are mounted on the front surface, It is provided with an effect member having a decorative substrate provided at the rear of the plate."

According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body which has a relief portion which is a part of the decoration and which is formed by three-dimensional relief, and whose rear surface is formed flat. , And a pattern which is provided on the rear side of the decorative body and constitutes the rest of the decoration, and a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by light interference fringes, and is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped decorative member composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet, and a plurality of LED accommodating portions provided behind the decorative member and recessed from the rear surface toward the front, And a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front on substantially the entire rear surface, and the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting parts. A transparent flat plate that can radiate light to the front, and multiple side views that are housed from the rear in the LED housing part of the radiant plate and that can irradiate light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiant plate The LED of the type is mounted on the front surface, and the effect member including the decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate is provided.

Thus, in the effect member, the transparent radiating plate and the decorative substrate are provided behind the decorative member including the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and the plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiating plate. A side-view type LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is inserted into each of the housing portions so as to be housed therein. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on this decorative substrate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, and It is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions formed on substantially the entire surface and is emitted forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Then, the light radiated forward from the radiation plate is radiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body that form the decorative member, so that the translucent decorative member provided with the decoration is provided. It will be decorated with light. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiating plate is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions within the plate thickness of the radiating plate so that the decorative member is illuminated and decorated. , The distance from the front surface of the radiating plate to the front of the radiating plate can be increased, and the light from the LED can be widened, as compared with the case where the LED is radiated toward the front. It can be diffused and emitted forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED can be diffused widely and it is possible to suppress the appearance of emitting light in a dot shape, so that the decorative member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated. It can be displayed neatly, entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the effect member, since the decorative substrate is provided behind the flat plate-like decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for disposing the effect member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and by providing various effect members, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can further entertain the player.

Furthermore, since the decorative member provided with decoration is composed of a decorative body having a relief portion and a decorative sheet having a pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration, It is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear by the lens effect by the relief of the relief portion. Therefore, since the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimension in the front-back direction) is reduced The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-described effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

Further, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decorative body. Further, since the decoration of the ornamental body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes and design changes.

In addition, the decoration sheet of the decoration member has a hologram portion in which a part of a pattern as a decoration is displayed by light interference fringes, and the light from the LED of the decoration substrate is provided in the game machine. By hitting the hologram part with light from other light emitting means, light in the game hall where this game machine is installed, etc., it is possible to show a predetermined hologram by the interference fringes of light, so that the decoration looks good with the hologram. It is possible to improve the interest of the player and strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to a part of the decoration of the decoration member by the hologram. It is possible to avoid feeling thinness.

Furthermore, since a part of the design of the decoration sheet is composed of the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief part, and thus the pattern of the hologram or the like is produced by the lens effect of the relief part. It is possible to give the player a sense of depth and to show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest. Further, since the decoration sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the decorative member, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the external shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, the decoration of the effect member can be given a feeling of openness and the decoration can be made large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the pattern of the decorative sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be sufficiently exerted, and the effect of the effect member can attract the interest of the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is made flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. Instead, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exerted. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member including the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made thin and can realize the above-described effects.

Further, the decoration sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decoration body, and since the outer edge of the effect member (decoration body) can be decorated with the design of the decoration sheet, it is adjacent to the effect member. By making the decoration mode of the present member continuous with that of the effect member, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, giving the player a visual impact and drawing attention. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions for accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear side, by accommodating the LEDs from the rear in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate, It is possible to make the front surface of the decorative substrate as close as possible, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to reliably embody the gaming machine having the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the LED of the decorative board is housed in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate and the light from the LED is emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion to within the plate thickness, the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiating plate. Even in the area of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, in the central part), the LED housing section is provided at the relevant area so that the light is emitted from the inner surface. Thus, it is possible to brightly emit light at the site, and the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, since the LED of the decorative substrate is of the side-view type, it is possible to store the LED in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate and cause the LED to emit light. It is possible to irradiate light in different directions, and it is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described operational effects.

In addition, the rear surface of the radiating plate has a plurality of reflecting portions, and light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member. Therefore, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the light is reflected. It is not necessary to change the parts, and it is possible to easily provide a game machine that can easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member and can easily respond to changes in the model or design.

Means 10: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is loaded by a player's operation,
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium,
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "reception opening" is "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area", "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium. Starting prize hole (starting opening) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate "the game medium is received in a specific inlet (chucker) in the game area, "Variable winning openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.)", "Ordinary lottery drawn by the game medium passing through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the variable winning opening (variable starting opening, winning portion winning opening, etc.) that allows the receiving of the game medium", "the specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the game medium is favored by the acceptance of the game medium. "Winning hole (variable starting port)", "V winning hole that generates an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning hole is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", Examples of the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage include a large winning opening and a winning slot for winning a game medium that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, as a "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by receiving a game medium into the starting opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means According to the special symbol is displayed after changing the stop display, the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result which is drawn by the combination of the stopped special symbols and the special lottery result display means for the advantageous game state. When a special lottery result to be generated is displayed, an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing the special winning opening (a so-called digital pachi machine)", "character winning When the distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth and the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the player winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. An advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (what is called a so-called honey machine)", "has a special winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is selected by receiving a game medium into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is predetermined. And the like, which includes an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing in a pattern of (a so-called multi-function peripheral), and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is provided with a game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving openings arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium, and a game to the receiving opening. A pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the media. With this, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-described means.

In addition, it is desirable that the effect of emitting decoration of the decoration member by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decoration substrate (light emission effect) is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the receiving port. As a result, when a game medium is received in the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and in addition, the effect of decorating the decorative member of the effect member with light emission is executed. It is possible to easily continue the driving of the game medium aiming at the entrance, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous game state in which the player receives an advantage in receiving the game medium into the starting opening, and the result is presented to the player when the result of the special lottery is suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decoration member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the decoration member is light-emitted, it is possible to give the player a strong impact and entertaining due to the above-described effects. Therefore, the special lottery result selected for the player is the player. It can be assumed that the advantageous gaming state in which is advantageous occurs (for example, "big hit"), and it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect having a higher effect by decorating the decoration member with light-emission, an effect for suggesting to the player the special lottery result selected by the lottery (for example, It can be preferably used for reach production) and can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 11: In any one of the means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of revolving bodies each having a plurality of patterns,
A starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is loaded,
A plurality of stop operating portions for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, respectively,
A slot machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies that have been rotation-stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation parts. It is characterized by

Here, as the “slot machine”, “one in which the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, “of a plurality of spinning bodies” An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage is given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery that has been drawn.”, “The effective line for determining the combination of stop symbols is fixed Have been done”, etc. In addition, as "privilege", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine is provided with a plurality of rotating bodies each provided with a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation unit for rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies by the player operating the game medium after inserting the game medium. According to the combination of the stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that are rotation stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating portions and the plurality of stop operating portions for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. A slot machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

In addition, in the effect (light effect) in which the decoration member is light-emitted by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate, the combination of the symbols whose rotation is stopped except one on the effective line is the combination of the winning symbol. When satisfied (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission. As a result, the decoration member is light-emitted and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the operation of the stop operation part can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decoration member may be light-emitted and decorated, so that the decoration member is light-emitted and decorated, which can give a strong impact to the player. , It is possible to make the player think that the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage occurs when the game is stopped with a combination of specific symbols (for example, "BB"), and increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a luminous effect with a higher effect by decorating the decoration member with light emission, it is suitable for an effect for suggesting to the player the selected internal lottery. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 12: In any one of the means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "fusion machine" that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine is a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in response to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. While displaying the variable, after that, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, and the advantage advantageous to the player (for example, , Advantageous game state). In addition, when the stop operation unit is not operated even after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachi-slot machine are fused, it is possible to obtain the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

In addition, in the effect (light effect) in which the decoration member is light-emitted by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate, the combination of the symbols whose rotation is stopped except one on the effective line is the combination of the winning symbol. As one of the effects presented to the player when it is satisfied (so-called reach), the decoration members of the effect members may be decorated with light emission, or the result of the internal lottery results in winning. At that time, the decoration member may be decorated with light emission, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position, as viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, it is possible to entertain the player by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to a game state.

Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) General winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate portion 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, and second big winning opening 2006 And are equipped with. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As a result, the player can entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the rear rear effect unit 3100, and the lower back. Left rendering unit 3200, back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, back front right rendering It is possible to entertain the player by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged laterally apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is brought into contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left at a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 allows the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c to be inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the right end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat horizontal lower fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and the front is open, and a ball biting prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 by the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side which is coincident with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and thus the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 due to the game ball B staying at the site of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball catching mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B easily stays on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame disassembled as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly as seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 which are mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. The lock member 52 and the mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51 are provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extending from a rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the front left and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

The lock member 52, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, allows the lock body 52a to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The rear handle relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 which cover from the rear side, the door frame relay substrate cover 107, and the handle rear relay substrate 106 which covers from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved to the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The speaker frame 103 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is mounted on the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape in a front view that is vertically extended. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion concave portion 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion concave portion 101c that penetrates in the front and rear direction of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates forward and backward at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 penetrates the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attaching member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from a rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b to each other and that are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

In addition, since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangular shape extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangular shape extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. For relaying the connection between the window interior decoration substrate 413, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portions extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The handle rear relay substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the handle rear relay substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are vertically spaced apart from each other. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction such that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is aligned with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the sides at the front ends of the pair of front extension portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 are hooked on these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). In the door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be vertically movable, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. The door frame upper hinge pin 122, when assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, has a vertically extending portion penetrating from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends horizontally against the urging force of the lock spring 124 downward, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to the body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b that is opened below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 which is a ball removing member 143 having a partition 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are respectively arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearward-opened portion on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time the ball holding section 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b covers the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking unit 144a from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) and remains on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings the ball feeding operation rod 146 in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. Then, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a, which is engaged with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that the ball feeding unit 140 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the ball removing member 143 pivotally supported or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B never enters.

Then, when the player presses down the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and is attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which the illegal game ball B is put in and out of the first starting opening 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B is launched (struck) by the ball launching device 540. The string attached to the illegal game ball B by force is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and a full tank receiving passage 610b that is open rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in a front view and is capable of communicating with the lower full tank delivery passage 610b of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting the rotation in the direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game ball B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated to move the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be mounted on the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions lower than the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97 ).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotating position below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is separated left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to follow a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side in a front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 and the base. A one-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is attached to the handle base 181 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a one-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the one-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three grooves 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 187), which are four protrusions 182a, 182b, third protrusions 182c, and 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 are locked so as to project rearward from a position inside the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center. The locking projection 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so that it curves inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c is located such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has a light-transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end thereof inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the fourth protrusion 182d is used as the first protrusion 182a and the handle 182 is replaced, so that the player can easily maintain the handle 182 at the "right-handed" position, It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is mounted to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the production operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. The transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the production operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The entire dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion that is approximately 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the front. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view goes under the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a from the position lower than the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically, and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and the lower plate ball hole 202a can be opened. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the front side. The released game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by the shortest distance movement.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extends to the left and right, and an upper plate that has an upper plate 201 that is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front portion of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and attached to the right side of the attachment base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and an upper dish removal unit 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. The upper plate bowl removal unit 240 is attached to the rear of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left with respect to the left-right center in a front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c in a tubular shape, and front and rear on the upper right side in front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. And an upper dish ball feed port 211e located at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and an upper portion on the left side of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g, which penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front and rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates in the front and rear direction at the lower right corner of the front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a, which is assembled to the door frame 3, passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. In addition, a downstream end of the ball removal guide passage 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the plate ball and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving opening 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges to the front rather than the center of the left and right as viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulged portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that the closed upper part near the right end of the upper plate body 212 goes under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates in the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting projection 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). (Omitted) after inserting cash or a prepaid card, rent a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and display the remaining amount of the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. It is for the purpose of, for example, cash or a prepaid card inserted into a ball lending machine, and the amount of the rented game ball B is subtracted and returned.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the pullout button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removing bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removing the upper bowl is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 which is behind the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231 and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removal button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 of the upper bowl removal unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Equipped with.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feed guide path 241b. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangle shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 moves. Through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in a state where the upper dish ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side through the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252 separately from each other in the left and right direction. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted on the entire surface of the plate unit body 252 below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate plate decoration unit 275, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the opened rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower dish body 251 has a bottom surface located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 in the state where it is assembled to the dish unit 200, and the lower dish ball discharge hole 202a supplies the lower dish ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right in the upper portion, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c which extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in the shape of a box whose rear is opened, and the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the lower plate left decoration unit 280, the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower right plate decoration unit are formed on the front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left side upper bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that a player's finger can be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom face cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is placed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower dish ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and on the right end side, the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball withdrawing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In a normal state of the lower dish ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, so that the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate upper right ornament 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right ornament 276, And a plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. A raised step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his/her step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to catch his/her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Further, due to the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower left ornamental body 281 and a plate lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left ornamental body 281. A plate left lower decoration substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate left lower reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulge portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The plate lower left decorative body 281 has a semi-circular curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the plate lower left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has a translucent lower dish right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish lower portion attached to the rear side of the dish right lower ornamental body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape at the right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear into the plate lower right decoration body 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making the LEDs emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 looks like the right end of the dish lower side is embedded in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration body 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be illuminated and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted on the plate center lower reflector 315. And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and forward below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a half arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The unit front cover 312, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a that projects further forward than a front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and at the same time, the plate center lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative member 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted from the rear into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate central lower decorative member 312b can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semi-circular arc shape, When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, it is possible to make the whole of them substantially uniformly light-emitting decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 is formed into a box-like shape having a substantially cubic outer shape, and has a main body 321 whose upper side is open, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and is opened upward to rotatably support the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around the axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the vertically extending axis and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332, and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is circumferentially spaced outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer top cover mounting portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer ring lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which circular arcs forming an outer portion and a lower portion of a circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a protruding upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a toward the center. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from an inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. The cylindrical surface portion 337b and the inner cover attachment portions 337c that are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and are arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the speed change gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at a constant interval. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple with respect to the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate and vibrate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotational operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is formed. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such as the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the front lower side. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical center press operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation portion 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference thereof is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached to the elevating cam member 371 for elevating and lowering the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. The central button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 for urging the central button body 373 upward, and the central button body 373 are substantially the same. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 configure a central pressing operation portion 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer circumference of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and ascending/descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380, which is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center, is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 is movable is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The lift cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the lift cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the lift cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can cause the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape extending upward from the inner circumference of the base plate portion 378a so that the central button main body 373 has a cylindrical shape. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lift cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. Further, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is projected higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being largely protruded from the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 attach the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

Thus, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the lift base 364 stops moving and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the lift detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in the plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing force of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotating operation unit 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation section 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 in the counterclockwise direction in left side view, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is smaller than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened to assist. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation section 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and the central pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) to detect the pressing. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotating operation portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In addition, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable.

It should be noted that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players may find it easier to perform a rotating operation with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be a hindrance to the rotational operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change of the rotation, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough in the position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward is vertically extended. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left side of 453.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorations 410b arranged inside the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or the player who is playing on the right pachinko machine. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and the player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs of the side window decoration part 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a portion corresponding to the window decoration part 410b and a plurality of side window decoration members 412 are provided. Internal reflectors 414 are respectively inserted inside the side window interior decorations 410b.

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up and down direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 formed with a through hole 417a that extends in a horizontal direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration board 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (in this case, three) side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-like cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decoration member 412, the front end of the side window decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position above the center in the up-down direction and above the center. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, that is, upper, lower, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end toward the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 has a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically elongated elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and allows the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. By illuminating the side window interior decoration portion 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that light-embellish the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. Through the space between the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility). Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity by other portions including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible for the player to make the whole of the game area 5a hard to see, and by making it difficult for the player to feel as if being seen by another player, it is possible to cause the other player to play the game without hesitation. ..

Furthermore, when the three LEDs on the side window interior decoration part 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on playing games and to prevent feeling lost due to mistakes being triggered, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating players to playing games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. , And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 mounted near the left and right front ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively mounted on the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the left and right ends near the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portions 451a of the door frame top bases 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 respectively extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, and the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically separated from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b, which are arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-and-down direction, and the rotation operation section 302 arranged on the upper side and operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easy to see, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 is to be rotationally operated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation part 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected far more forward than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b should be made to stand out greatly. At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, A bottom hinge frame assembly for a main body frame that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. The ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, the reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape that extends left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in the shape of a groove opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and the ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a that is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b, which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height of the game board 5, is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 is placed on the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f that penetrates the front and rear on the right side in front view of the portion 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear penetrates on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a front view, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

On the body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the front and rear ends of the guide main body 502a that penetrate through the front and rear and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state where the guide body 502a of the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at the upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) along with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main frame upper frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the front view in a horizontally extending portion and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 can be attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a which is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes a meandering state in a plan view, and an illegal tool is left from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the hitting solenoid 542 which is a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the shooting base 541 and which extends forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the hitting solenoid 542, It is equipped with a launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downward, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From above to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a back plate upper part 551d, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side and extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open inward of the front and the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base portion 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and extending in the left-right direction and having a box shape that is open upward, and a portion extending in the left-right direction of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is installed on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes low at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B which is circulating in two stages by this rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the flag (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, and is not protruding. Becomes

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is open rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. A ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b closes the ball-removing path 580b. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height from the top so that it gradually moves to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape that is concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the discharge passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from the top in a rear view. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in the portion extending from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. This allows the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b to be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout vane 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or to retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pull-out lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can contact the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

In this way, in the state in which the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the device vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent a strong force from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball removal movement due to the collision of the game ball B is possible. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and damage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball-removing movable piece 592, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, so that the ball-ball moving movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601. The upper full tank base 601 is attached to the rear side and has a front open box. The upper full tank cover 602, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of its overall width and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of its overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal delivery passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper ordinary delivery passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward. In the upper full-ball path unit 600, which is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from either of the above. In addition, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 which can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (the downstream end) of each of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction as it approaches. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are respectively installed in the upper full ball. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball storage portion 589b is moved in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout vane 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It will also be retained in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts against the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-moving movable piece 592, and therefore the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the bottom rear side. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board placing portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically near the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most to the rear. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b bulging forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. The space and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, the enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly damped in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with a deep bass sound even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 has a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and a speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B emitted from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives a game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that opens to the right in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

An upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is opened to the left at the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end is opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in front view by the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharge ball receiving section 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. 97)). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the interface board 635 and the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The substrate base 634 is attached to a rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is located behind the main body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (on the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the main body frame base 501 extending in the vertical direction at a rear end thereof so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the work hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653.

In addition, the locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653.

In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 99(a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from a ball tank flow in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear side on the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream side end, and a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 and downstream of the tank rail 553 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that the left side thereof becomes lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side opened. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end in the plan view, and then to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .. In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel to the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to close the upper side. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in a row in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes a line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. Beveled corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is less likely to disperse, the game ball B inside is constantly pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clogging). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. Since the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be dispersed are dispersed, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging (ball clogging) from occurring.

Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, as described above. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface part 501m while being inclined so that the side (left side) farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open. And an outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and an upper side of the plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and an upper surface thereof is an overflow surface portion. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a vertically extending front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both outer sides in the left and right direction of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, respectively, and extends in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at a narrower interval than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a rear end lowering 552h. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end thereof moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B is moved from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball gam inside the tank rail 553 by discharging the sphere into a wide area.

In addition, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b extends obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of about ½ of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c It is formed in a shape extending in parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end of the front wall 552b and the end of the rear wall 552c in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange that extends laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely on the left side thereof and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height becomes lower stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553 and then becomes leftward along the tank rail 553 to be higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after being extended to a nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion is opened by operating the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge is crossed. Can be flown to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface 501m, and at the same time it can be flowed from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball debris) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem in which the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also higher, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) with respect to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. The flow can be made to flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other and being bitten by the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B occurs. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they go toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that are stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be located far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no possibility that a short-circuit or disconnection of electric wiring will occur due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface section 501m, or to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and a problem occurs when the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. .. FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the table unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

In the following, when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is square, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in the direction parallel to the surface of the decoration board (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. In 2006 or the like, the game is to entertain or pass through the handle 182, and to entertain the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and whose outer shape is a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and defines the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, in which a game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700 that is formed, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like) that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a decorative drive board, a production drive board 1720 that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and a drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the production drive board 1720. The rear side of the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 so that the left side thereof can be hinge-rotatably attached, and the right side of the drive substrate box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2006 which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an outlet 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a, and a game ball B provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. The first attacker unit 2400 that is present, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. A second attacker unit 2600 provided on the right side of the object 2500 above the first attacker unit 2400 and having a second special winning opening 2006, and one provided above the second attacker unit 2600. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall that is open to the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and the flat front left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 116(b) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view in the clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and an outer rail 1001 that passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extends to an upper right portion. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 2010 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The out opening 2010 is penetrated by a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a functional display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the functional display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

In addition, the front constituent member 1000 is formed substantially transparent, and the game panel 1100, the rear unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player's side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B (circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is approximately the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1020 penetrate the notch 1010 and the lower full tank ball. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out-ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step and a plurality of projecting pins that project forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. The three engaging claws that elastically engage the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging step portions on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above, and moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where it is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in the state of being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the rear unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below. You can

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the gate sensor 2801, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening. The sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, the second sub-out sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, a detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, displays a status indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B in the gate portion 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result which is drawn by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting slot 2004 and the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

Furthermore, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (the number of rounds). It has a round display consisting of five LEDs for displaying.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects further forward than the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Through, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. Different from the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning opening 2005 in which it is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B It is possible to accept the game ball B in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is provided at the position and is selected by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The second big prize hole 2006 is provided.

Of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the other one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the bottom end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the vertical direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the right general winning opening 2001.

The first sub-out opening 2011 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is arranged on the right side of the right general winning opening 2001.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. A first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second special winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600. Of the side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and which has one general winning opening 2001 and the second sub-out mouth 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800 that is installed.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118(a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 118(b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, (c) 8D is a left side view of the starting opening unit, and FIG. 8D is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the out opening 2010 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending from the middle in the front-rear direction to the outer side in the left-right direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape such that the front view shape is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long in the left and right and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from a peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101 and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the left-right direction is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then opens upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is shown. Located just below the center of the. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 toward the rear of the gaming panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to stand out from the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002. A lottery of special lottery results (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player, such as a "big hit" game, is advantageous, can be performed by allowing the game ball B to be received in the first starting opening 2002 Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

In this starting opening unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B to the rear is inclined at a gentler angle (angle near horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B toward the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the pleasure (sense of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be enjoyed for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

In addition, in the state where the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the under-rear center effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located on the rear side, and is provided in the under-rear center effect unit 3300. Light is emitted and decorated by the light from the LEDs of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322, the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329, and the like of the back lower middle decorative unit 3320.

Further, although not shown in detail, the starting opening unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that extends over the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 comes into contact with the rib and is guided rearward. The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is in the first front wall 2203. It is possible to make it later than the timing of being guided to the rear by contacting the inclined portion, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate and a second base plate that extends in a gutter-like shape from the base plate in the front-rear direction and is inclined so that the front end thereof moves backward as it goes downward. One guide gutter, a first front wall part that closes the front end side of each of the two first guide gutters, and a gutter-like extension from the base plate to the front and back on the left side of the two first guide gutters. And a second front wall portion closing the front end side of the second guide trough. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide trough 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guide trough 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically with the upper part extending vertically from the bottom at a position of about 3/4 height, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower part moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally up to. Therefore, the first front wall 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide trough 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. And, the game ball B can be received by the first front gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 which are projected forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall 2203 and the second front wall 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. Further, in the side unit 2200, in a state where the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 that project rearward of the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, it projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided to the rear.

The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the back transfer unit 3050 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B transferred to any of the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the fourth transfer opening 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then the game ball B is located below. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall 2203 or the second front wall 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less visible than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , Doesn't look bad.

In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the rear lower left portion of the back unit 3000 due to the portion. Light radiated forward from the lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the rendering unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the light of the pachinko machine 1 can be reflected. You can improve the appearance.

In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is fast. The bottom surfaces of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily attracted to the general winning opening 2001 for a long time while surely letting the player recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to the next game ball B, other first winning openings 2002, first winning openings 2005, second winning openings 2006, and other winning openings. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the pleasure (sense of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be enjoyed for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is seen from the side of the first guide trough 2202. It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined portion of. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. There is a risk that the player will feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side because the gaming ball B is not paid out, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the guided game ball B for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the player has the illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, a part of the game ball B is allowed to pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, so that the front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is in front of the game ball. When most of the game ball B (at least more than half of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 when B passes, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It is possible to entertain the player by giving the illusion of being accepted. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall from feeling distrustful even if no benefits (payout of the game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) are given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained and continue to enjoy the game, and to prevent a decrease in interest.

Moreover, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. And has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, some players can make an illusion that it is received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is a starting opening, the special drawing result is not drawn, so that the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. There is a risk that However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by “right hitting”) away from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction, and the second Since a decorative sticker for indicating the starting opening is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that the opening is not the starting opening, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering.

Also, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 as compared with the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. It is possible to reduce the cost and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001.

The inclination angle of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning hole 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, but the variable winning holes such as the big winning hole and the prize winning hole are closed so that they can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the angle of inclination from the horizontal when the gaming ball B is guided to the winning opening side and is rotated around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to move forward. It has an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable winning a prize is larger than that of the general winning a prize 2001, most of the game balls B to the variable winning a prize will be given. Will come to wish for a prize. Alternatively, even if the player has a variable winning opening (large winning opening) for which the specified winning number is set, he or she will desire to win more than the specified number. Therefore, the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is set to be gentler than the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall 2203), so that the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning port, the accepted game ball B is visible for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning port 2001. In contrast, it is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning port, and at the same time, to the general winning port 2001, the pleasure (sense of superiority) for the game ball B being accepted into the variable winning port can be recognized. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than when it was accepted. Further, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time until the winning opening door in the open state is closed. Therefore, more than the specified number of game balls B are won for the player. Can make you feel like doing.

In addition, in the two right general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, a portion that extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall 2203 than the distance of the portion that vertically extends downward from the upper end. Is formed longer. As a result, since the prize hole is the general prize hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the ordinary lottery and the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general prize hole 2001 is given. Can be hidden from the player's view early.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 shows the one in which the front surface of the specific general winning opening 2001 is tilted out of the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 can be used. You may make it the front surface of the winning opening 2001 incline. Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is allowed to enter the game ball B which is launched to the launch position (so-called "left hit") in the normal gaming state. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front face is not tilted is set in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probability variation" or "big hit"). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right hit”) may be provided at a position where it can enter the ball, or may be provided at both positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclined front surface is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening) is opened and then opened. The angle is narrow. When the number of payouts of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, even if the special winning opening is defined, the player can win more than the specified number. I wish. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed when the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with its front surface tilted to the back side. There is. In other words, when the number of payouts to the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts at the time of winning at the special winning opening, is achieved, it is considered to be faster than the speed at which the gaming ball B winning at the big winning opening rolls to the back side. ing. That is, it can be said that the more the payout holes are paid out, the later it takes to disappear from the player's view. As a result, the more prizes are paid out, the longer the joy of winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward. The upper left side unit 2300 is formed entirely transparent.

The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role object 2500 to the right side below the center role object 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first special winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view, and from the front of the front face of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first special winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting opening 2004 is provided in the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the first special winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and more than the second starting opening 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out opening 2011 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and at a position lower than the first special winning opening 2005.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and the second start port sensor 2401, and detects the game ball B received in the first special winning port 2005. The special winning opening sensor 2402, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and the magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting an illegal magnetism are provided. The first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided in pairs of two, respectively.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming the flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. A rear cover 2413, a second start opening door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second start opening 2004, and a second start opening door 2414 movable to open and close the second start opening 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for operating the starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first big winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big winning opening 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the one big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance/retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. And a member 2419.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for illuminating the first special winning opening 2005. A second starting opening sensor 2401, a first winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2404, a starting opening solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, a first winning opening decoration board 2420, and a panel relay board. A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening portion 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening portion 2411a, and a left-right direction. A second opening 2411c that extends longitudinally left and right in the upper part on the left side of the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that extend side by side under the second opening 2411c so as to line up left and right. The first sub-out port 2011 is formed below the one guide hole 2411b and penetrates back and forth.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the left and right widths thereof are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a tubular shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower.

Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e are the contact portions of the front cover 2412, and the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached in a state where the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 to the left of the first guide hole 2411b and to the right of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in the shape of a box that is opened rearward and is transparent. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage of the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in the front view. It is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b so that the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B lowers to the left. A third shelf 2412c extending shorter than the part 2412b and a third shelf 2412c with a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B leftward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends downward from the lower position to the left and that forms a first special winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2412a. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. From the right end of the fourth vertical wall 2412h vertically extending to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth vertical wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. From the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the sixth standing wall portion 2412j.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the left. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the right. At the top, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side after inclining so that the game ball B is allowed to flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and the game ball B is lowered to the left side. And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher toward the side. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the position of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portion of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the direction of approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partitioning portion 2412o which connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the space in which the game ball B can flow between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided to open. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The upper shelf portion 2412p has its right end located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and its left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined such that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and in a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions projecting rearward in shape. These abutting portions are the game balls B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state, and the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold the second starting opening door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first special winning opening door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich them.

The second starting opening door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the plate portion 2414a, the arm portion 2414b extending downwardly from the door portion 2414a, and the arm portion 2414b, and the unit base 2411. A rotary shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided in a lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and that is separated from the rotary shaft 2414c and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting opening door 2414 can close the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting opening door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c as the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 moves forward and backward, whereby the door portion 2414a moves in the forward and backward directions. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting opening solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In this starting opening solenoid 2415, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first special winning opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends of the door portion 2417a in the left-right direction, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c extending from the lower end in the left-right direction coaxially with each other, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a vertically extending slit 2419c of a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

The first special winning opening door 2417 can close the first special winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first special winning opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c as the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 moves forward and backward, whereby the door portion 2417a moves forward and backward. The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In the first attacker solenoid 2418, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a non-energized state, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 passes through the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the left and right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can lighten and decorate the first special winning opening 2005 by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting opening solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is located above the second starting opening 2004, and the state in which the gaming ball B cannot be received in the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is located above the first big winning opening 2005, and it is impossible to receive the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. It is in a state of. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414. After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, the second shelf 2412b is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls to the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and is left by the inclination thereof. Roll towards you. In addition, when the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left comes in contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p and bounces back to the right, a gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately and roll to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is discharged to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from its left end after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is then returned to the fifth transfer port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passes through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (on the door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper side of the second starting opening 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Becomes That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 while the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall part 2412f and the third standing wall part 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first lateral wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is transferred to the fifth transfer port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves back together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed rearward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first special winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will be moved. The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. The game ball B is ready to be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the gaming ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and then the fifth standing wall portion. After being detected by one of the two first special winning opening sensors 2402 through the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth standing wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o, It falls on the three lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped on the third lateral wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, so that the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. Since the first prize hole 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a around the rotary shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first prize hole 2005 (first The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402 to detect the unit base 2411. Since it is designed to be released to the rear, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being stagnant between the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and many game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126A is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 126B is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly above the center in the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is in the frame. It cannot be entered.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like shape protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the assembled state on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is inserted in the panel plate 1110. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

The thicknesses of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line shape so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost side above a warp inlet 2511 described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is the middle of the vertically extending portion. Has a shape that bulges to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion that bulges leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The shape is different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is linearly formed so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135 ). The support part 2503 of this part is a state where the support part 2503 is assembled to the game board 5, and the part of the support part 2503 which extends linearly up and down on the tip side is a front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is substantially along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the front end side of the support portion 2503 matches the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively rearward. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp inlet 2511 has a rectangular wall extending rightward while the peripheral wall part 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support part 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, and thus the shape of the shutter 3732 seems to be a part. , And the support part 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a portion of the front wall of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is openable in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B discharged from the warp exit 2512. It is provided with a stage 2513 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 which is provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from the outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B on the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) such that the position of the center in the left-right direction when mounted on the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion (central emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side emission portion 2513b) on both left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, which is higher than the center emission part 2513a, is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game ball B can flow. This center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven to the upper right of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the up-down direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending in a vertical direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the first guide passage 2521 has the right end of its entrance located immediately below the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stopper 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which projects rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an inlet opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an outlet opening diagonally downward left with a width of one game ball B.

The lower right guide passage 2530, when assembled to the game board 5, has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the rear unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection molding die without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. Further, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located at positions as close to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 as possible. Since the transparent center accessory 2500 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the rear front left decoration 3030 and the rear left production unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred. From this, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the support portion 2503 and the like are transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body or the effect display device 1600 that can be light-emitted, light emitted from them can be used for light emission decoration and a good appearance. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross hatching portion in FIG. 135). , The light emitted forward from the LED on the front left decoration board 3714 in the front left front production unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to give a gorgeous luminous decoration. It can be shown to the player. Note that steps or cutouts may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the rear can be diffused due to the steps or the like, and the image can appear more glittering.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided because the flange portion 2502 projecting outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as large as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role object 2500 is better compared to the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

The edge of the support part 2503 may have the same shape as the shape of the front cover 3711 of the back front left effect unit 3700 (the shape of the ornament) provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from being conspicuously deteriorating the decorative property of the rear decorative body due to the support part 2503 being different from the rear decorative property, and at the same time, the support part 2503 can also be decorative Can be increased.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the thing which suppresses that it looks blurry is shown, the invention is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 distant from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided rearward may be made to appear blurry.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the rear wall portion 2501 may not have a rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. .. When the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role object 2500 does not have the flange part 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128A is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side center unit, and the gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128B is the second attacker unit, the side right center unit, and the front unit in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in a cross section.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the up-down direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second special winning opening 2006 that opens and closes to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second special winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602 and. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 by closing the second special winning opening 2006 so that the second special winning opening 2006 can be opened and closed. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance/retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second special winning opening door 2611, and the second large winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and discharging it backward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second special winning opening 2006 opens to the left from the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the second big winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning opening door 2611 bulges downward from a semicircular bottom side, a right side that is in contact with the right end of the bottom side and linearly extends upward, and a left side from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semi-circular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotation shaft. And a pin (not shown). The second big winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotation shaft rotatably attached so that the upper end moves leftward.

Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction with the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, so that the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that the right side of the second attacker unit 2600 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 when assembled on the game board 5, and the second big winning hole 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center role object 2500. A space where the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 has a rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

In this second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, in accordance with the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. The second big winning opening door 2611 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a by sliding in the slit while being slid.

Thereby, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 is moved to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the second special winning opening door 2611, the game ball B rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second special winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged rearward. The game ball B discharged backward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the table unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

The side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear, and the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear. And two induction passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends rightward and then further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends backward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

This side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. There is.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and a lower end in contact with an upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upwards over almost the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side with respect to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is a rear unit provided in the rear side. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been. The gate member 2800 is a gate unit 2003 for performing a lottery of the ordinary lottery result of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. 2801 and. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that projects obliquely to the lower left from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is, when assembled on the game board 5, an extension line thereof is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located in the approximate center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the game is performed on both left and right outer sides. The sphere B forms a clearance through which the ball can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, a center accessory 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer sides and the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates by abutting the game ball B.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Is adjusted so that the windmill W enters the region on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. Thus, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 with a certain probability by hitting the left side of the center character 2500 to flow down.

The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 of the center accessory 2500 are more than the game balls B that have flowed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is driven by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is struck so as to circulate on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role object 2500. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and with a lower probability than that, a part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W. Be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted into the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is transferred to any of 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly received in the first starting opening 2002. Then, the game ball B not received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and received in the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down onto the side unit 2200, passing between the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and thus the first probability is high. Accepted in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting opening 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passed to the first passing port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor. The sheet is detected by 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being caught.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center character 2500 is received by the second starting opening 2004, whereas the game ball B hit to the left side of the center character 2500 is. The probability of acceptance in the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the driving operation (“left hitting”) of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is inserted at a strength such that the game ball B enters above the portion that becomes lower rightward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-hand striking). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is a left side of the gate member 2800, a gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided in order of decreasing probability and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and passed to the ninth transfer opening 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out opening sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the ordinary lottery result in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the right side unit 2700, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. To the left of.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. The detection of the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 gives a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B.

The game ball B that has not been accepted into the second prize hole 2006 and has flowed to the left of the second prize hole 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely leftward) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly in the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 in accordance with its momentum, and their inclinations. Thus, after being rolled to the left and rolling from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may contact the plurality of obstacle nails N, so that the upper shelf portion 2412p does not flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a. May flow down. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N planted to the left. After coming into contact with each other, turning downward, and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first special winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to first It is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is discharged from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first winning opening 2005 is opened, It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the obstacle N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll rightward against the inclination thereof and may be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall 2412m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then is not returned into the game area 5a, but is not returned into the game area 5a, and the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, if the "normal win" is selected as the normal lottery result, the second start is performed. Since the mouth door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is received in the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

In addition, when the game ball B is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are obtained. As a result, when the “big hit” is selected by lottery, the first special winning opening door 2417 moves and the first special winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that it is released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left, it comes into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the second shelf portion 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelves 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

From this, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and “small hit” is performed. It is necessary to make a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 is required to allow the gate portion 2003 to pass the game ball B to draw (push) the "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. An operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of the.

Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the opening and closing, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right hit" so that the game ball B can be received in the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2006, and the first prize hole. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passages to be circulated allow passage of the gate portion 2003 easily. , The second sub-out port 2012 may be easily received, so that the striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball. It is possible to entertain the typing operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state can be drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing the "right hit", Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" and "big hit" may be drawn, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and the flat front left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. This back box 3010 is transparently made of synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape having an open front, a square opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape projecting backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame in the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the effect display device 1600 can be fitted in the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear so that the lock mechanism 3020 can slide left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface abutting the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting a decorative body, a rendering unit, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

The back box 3010 has a strip plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate that is attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame being transparent. The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 while being separated from each other in the left and right directions.

The back front left decoration 3030 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3031 and a decoration seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The front left decoration 3030 is opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decoration 3040 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3041 and a decoration seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side in the state assembled to the game board 5, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view. (See FIG. 111, FIG. 135, etc.). Further, the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are flat plate-shaped so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. Has been extended to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. Has been extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (hatched portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made invisible. Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side of the front left decoration 3030 can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, it is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left/right lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decoration 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decoration 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the front configuration upper left corner of the front component member 1000, the function display unit 1400 is not attached. Instead of 1400, the back-front left decoration body 3030 can hide the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 (functional component) provided behind.

On the other hand, in the back front right decoration 3040, when viewed from the front, it extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600, and a transparent front. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 invisible to the player, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the same function and effect as the front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front of the functional component provided on the rear side can be covered by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional component can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, by the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, and to give the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the portions outside the game area 5a in the decoration seal 3032 of the back front left decoration 3030 and the decoration seal 3042 of the back front right decoration 3040, which are provided with a predetermined decoration, are the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be seen from the front through them, it is possible to decorate the outside of the game area 5a with them, and it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

Further, as described above, the front front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can make the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 transparent, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the rear unit. Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the side of the player) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

The functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the parts of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 which are extended to the outside of the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in a front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, if an attempt is made to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be done may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be made large relative to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 are related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. As a result, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a can extend the design in the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. 5a can be made larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

[5-9c. Back guiding unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 136(b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially transparent.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Out port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. And a magnetic sensor 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor 3055 being provided in the rear part of the.

Further, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first transfer opening 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 is transferred, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the inside of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning port 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning port 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 The seventh transfer opening 3067 to which the game ball B thus received is transferred, the eighth transfer opening 3068 to which the game ball B received from the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is transferred, and the side right middle unit 2700. It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then ejects it downward, and a second delivery path. The game ball B transferred to the transfer port 3062 and the game ball B transferred to the third transfer port 3063 are merged, and then discharged to the second discharge path, and transferred to the fourth transfer port 3064. A third discharge path for guiding the game ball B downward and discharging it obliquely to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is below the sixth transfer port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after guiding to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery opening 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. To be done. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inner side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063 The ball B is merged in the second discharge path, then detected by the general winning opening 2001, and then discharged downward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth receiving opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharging path. ..

It is accepted by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400, is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the game ball B and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 and the game ball B transferred to the second winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge passage.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 is on the upstream side of the portion communicating with the ninth transfer opening 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer-out opening 3069 merges with the fourth discharge passage after being detected by the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, It is discharged through the four discharge channels.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detecting member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B that has been received in the out opening 2010 that is open at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (the game ball B that has not been granted a privilege, also referred to as “out ball”) belongs to.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted into the out-recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the game ball B is a cylindrical portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape so that the game ball B can flow, and a cylindrical portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that projects in a horizontal direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and a rear end of the tubular portion 3081 that is continuous with the game ball B downward. And a rear cover 3084 which can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the tubular portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The tubular portion 3081 is substantially the same size as the outlet 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned (a width in which the three game balls B are not aligned), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved such that the front end side thereof protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with two out-out sensors 3053 arranged side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing through the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081. The game ball B that has circulated is detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface of the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change at the portion of the outlet sensor 3053, so that the outlet sensor 3053 can smoothly detect the gaming ball B and the gaming ball B. Can be promptly discharged, and can be suppressed from being stagnated on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 has the tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out recessed portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the upper end of the front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects further forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114 ). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out opening 2010. The gaming ball B is passed through the tubular portion 3081 and detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out-ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, the partition portion 3082 partitions the space between the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is It is possible to guide to the left side outlet sensor 3053 side, and it is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right outlet sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the number of gaming balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the driving operation most suitable for the game situation and entertain the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, the projection of the partitioning portion 3082 is shortened to make it easy for the game ball B to get over, so when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, The game ball B can be escaped to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B of the portion 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the outlet 2010 without being stagnant.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected below the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward in the out-ball detecting member 3080 and is out-out sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent it from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010.

In the present embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recessed portion 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recessed portion 1123. In addition to being possible, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub-out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning a prize. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B in the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning opening, It is possible to inform that fraudulent acts are being performed.

Moreover, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by detecting the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first large From the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the “ball-out rate” in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a display section for displaying the “ball payout rate”.

In addition, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“all balls”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“all balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, only the “out ball” is detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out-port sensor 3054. It is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 by comparing the respective numbers of “” and “all balls”.

[5-9d. Back production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 137(b) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the rear-end effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear-end effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost side (front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape whose front view is opened downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decoration body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the up-down direction.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 is a translucent decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of front-side movable decorative bodies 3111 that are provided behind the decorative body 3111. The rear-rear decoration board 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and the decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decoration board 3114 are provided. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are full-color LEDs. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 can make the decorative body 3111 (back rear movable decorative body 3110) emit light.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 vertically extending on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have

The rear rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is open downward, and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. The unit base 3121 and the left side of the unit base 3121 extend vertically in a columnar shape. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back-end movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends to the left side of the slide shaft 3122 in parallel with the slide shaft 3122, and has a spiral on the outer periphery. Spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

In addition, the rear rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 serving as a rotation shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 that is attached, the motor base 3127 that attaches the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and a slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and that can abut the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-back movable decoration 3110. Equipped with.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, a back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back-rear detection sensor 3136. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connection between the front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are mounted on the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137, and the production drive board 1720. The rear rear left relay board 3139 that relays the rear rear decorative board 3114 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, which is mounted between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the production drive board 1720. A rear rear right relay board 3140 that relays.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 that have moved downward to absorb the shock. An upper end and a lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back lower back detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear rear movable decoration 3110. Further, the slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can abut on a lower surface thereof.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. The transmission slider 3131 is vertically movable only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a cylindrical protrusion rearward from near the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121 and the lower end of the spring 3132 is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which the vertices are chamfered in a front view. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex above the rotation axis. And a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and also extends in the left-right direction. An abutting surface 3134b that extends and is capable of abutting the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear rear movable ornament 3110, and is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes downward from the right end of the abutting surface 3134b, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 slidably in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is in the retracted position in which the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear rear movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the 3110 abuts.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of 3132 causes the link member 3133 to act in the clockwise direction around the rotation axis, and the lock member 3134 to urge in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (defective), the remaining movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from falling (falling). it can.

In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b in which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable ornament 3110, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the rear-rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the rear shaft drive motor 3126 rotates the spiral shaft 3123 in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view), the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking projection 3116b of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back rear movable decoration 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward, away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decoration body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 causes the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It contacts the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 in which the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b is used. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen back rear movable decoration body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, whereby the fall is stopped and the state becomes the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this state of the appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear back movable ornament 3110, and the rear rear movable ornament 3110 does not contact.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 has dropped. In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

When the back rear movable decoration 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the reverse direction (here, in the clockwise direction in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When this slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the biasing force of the spring 3132. As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing to, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

Then, when the rear movable movable ornament 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that tries to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides to the right due to the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is moved downward by the lock member 3134. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is detected by the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 can be returned from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

According to the rear-rear production unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible to the player side to the appearance position invisible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the back-end movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is released to the left, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving it, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when releasing the lock.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration behind the back]
Next, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-and-back movable decorative body together with the back-and-back decorative substrate. 143(a) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144(a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and FIG. 144(b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 147 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decoration body in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decoration substrate by broken lines in the front view of FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, and FIG. 149(b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a), (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143(a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the decoration by the ornament and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the rear-rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable ornament. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED, and FIG. 153(b) is a view showing the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body, and a decorative sheet, and the back rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the rear rear decorative substrate in an enlarged manner and showing it together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. 155(a) is a front view of the back-rear decoration substrate, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the back-rear decoration substrate. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of (a). It is an expanded sectional view, (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 has two first decorative portions 3151 respectively provided near the left and right ends and a left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in a line. Each first decoration part 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, the second decorative portions 3152 each imitate a predetermined character and are arranged in a row on the left and right to form a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. As described above, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is decorated with the logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 146, the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 in the rear rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the relief-shaped unevenness. A transparent flat sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3111 having a transparent plate-like decoration 311 and a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decoration 311 and constituting the rest of the decoration portion 3150. 3112, a transparent light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front side of the light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. Rear decorative board 3114, a flat decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, and extends vertically to the left of the decorative body 3111. A left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 that extends vertically to the right of the decorative body 3111 are provided.

[5-9d-2. Backside movable ornaments]
The ornamental body 3111 is formed such that the front surface side and the rear surface side are generally flat. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding forward and shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion. The third decorative protrusion 3111c, which is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward, is provided. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided in a portion that is the contour of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer circumference of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111 a and the third decorative protrusion 3111 c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

The decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d (a first foil stamping region (see FIG. 156(a))) that protrudes forward of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the first decorative protrusion 3111a. In FIGS. 147 to 149, a shaded portion having a light and shade is provided. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 150, FIG. 156(a), etc., the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided in a curved front surface portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Is not provided on the side surface of the. Thereby, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, a high-grade feeling can be imparted by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curved metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided in a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c is made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to reflect the light to the rear side and illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side, so that the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, the base material of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front surface side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like project is directed upward. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface has elasticity and which is heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged above the base material of the decorative body 3111. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the base material of the decorative body 3111 to a position (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) of the hot plate, The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion of the hot sheet that contacts the decorative body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be in a good state even in a three-dimensionally shaped portion such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil stamped). As a result, as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metallic decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, by lowering the hot plate to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first decoration protrusion 3111d is formed. It is possible to form a decorative body 3111 by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state where the base material of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color is used to set the hot plate to the second decorative protrusion. It is lowered to a position lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil pressing area FS2), and the first metal foil is applied to the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transcribe. Then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is transferred to the position (first foil pressing area FS1) and transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b are formed with the metal decoration portion 3111d of different colors without performing the masking process on the base material of the decoration body 3111. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film in a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeled) by laser light, The decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decoration portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface portion.

The ornamental body 3111 of the back rear movable ornamental body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e which is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the recess 3111e makes it possible to equalize the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 and suppress the deformation of the resin due to sink marks during injection molding.

The rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact with each other, so that light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visible.

Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the front recessed portion 3111e in the rear concave portion 3111e. As a result, diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, that is, the portions from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in a portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Back decorative sheet of movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on its rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, in a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a that is present, and a second contour portion 3112b that is provided between the second ornamental portion 3152 and the first ornamental protrusion portion 3111a that is double formed in the ornamental body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); The second light provided on the inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (the portion on the rear side of the third decorative protrusion 3111c) which is provided in the double of the decorative body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152. And a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have

As shown in FIG. 149(b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern simulating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is The hologram is used to display the interference fringes of light. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram portion of the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is colored using white or pink. It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having a glitter that is glittering in the form of particles.

The first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and the metal is Since the decorative portion 3111d has a portion having the same color (gold in the present embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metallic decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the rear back movable decoration body 3110.

The first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the front pattern and hologram. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, it is possible to increase the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112, and to make the back-back movable decorative body 3110 emit brighter light. In addition to the above, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the ornamental body 3111, it is flat on the rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 except for the rear concave portion 3111e. It is provided behind the site. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a by the surface, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111 without being diffusely reflected.

The 2nd outline part 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 is formed in the black linear shape of predetermined width, as shown in figure. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion between the doubled first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 in the second decorative portion 3152. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusion portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b), etc., in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is pruned by the first decorative portion 3151, at the portion of the first light diffusion portion 3112c, from the center of the petal to the peripheral edge. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed by printing so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) as it goes. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing section 3112c is caused to emit light, the pear skin pattern of the first light diffusing section 3112c causes a slight Since different shades appear, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the luminous decoration of the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing section 3112d is provided on the entire inner side of the first decorative projection 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative sections 3152, as shown by the shaded areas in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been. The second light diffusing unit 3112d has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a semitransparent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing section 3112d is caused to emit light, a predetermined pattern is formed by the dot-like pattern of the second light diffusing section 3112d. It is possible to make the second decoration portion 3152 composed of the characters “E” emit light with a uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e which is recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the existence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the light from the front causes the first light. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, that is, the portions from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The rest of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet which is the base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light so that the light-transmitting radiation plate 3113 emits light. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and applied to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side and the side surface remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is passed from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e allows the player to see a luminescent decoration such that the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is lit by the afterglow. Moreover, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light that has been transmitted through the transparent portion 3112e and emitted from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to the outside. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. It is possible to make the decoration of the rear rear movable decoration 3110 look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is not framed, and therefore the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a feeling of unity, and the game can be played. It is possible to give the player a visual impact and draw attention to the player, to enjoy a large decoration, and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest.

Although the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment shows the decorative body 3111 provided with the transparent transparent portion 3112e behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided also at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. Thus, when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 from being unattractive. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration protrusion 3112a in the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the decorative portion 3150 can be made to look good.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate with movable decoration behind the back]
As shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 146, etc., the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body part 3113a extending left and right, a flange part 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 3113a, and a main body. The plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear-rear decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the main body portion 3113a that penetrates in the front-rear direction A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. ..

The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The main body 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110.

The first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decoration sheet 3112 in which the shade of pink color is dark. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center side than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the ornamental body 3111 in each of the five petals of the cherry blossoms. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner circumference is provided on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149(c) and 153(c). It is formed in the open state. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion of the main body portion 3113a that is thinner than its thickness from being formed, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, Part of the light is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated|emitted inside 3113c. Then, when the light emitted inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the light is emitted from the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body part 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing part 3113c, it is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing part 3113c. The light passing through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is partially reflected by the inner peripheral surface portion and the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side. The amount of light will be greatly reduced compared to before passing.

Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided inside the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light passing through the first LED housing portion 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, in the portion where the first LED 3114a is stored, light does not pass to the side opposite to the first LED storage portion 3113c. Thus, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at the optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent light emission decoration by being guided to another second decoration portion 3152, and it is possible to surely make only the desired second decoration portion 3152 of the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 emit light. ..

The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, and “☆” are provided. In order to perform light emission decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer circumference of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. As described above, the first LED 3114a is provided. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, in the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED housing portion 3113c that houses the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating a part of the "i" is provided with the extending portion 3113j that extends so as to cover the upper part of "☆". ing. By this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for light emitting decoration of "☆" being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is illuminated, "I" is not illuminated. Further, it is possible to reduce (block) the light for illuminating and decorating the “i” guided to the “☆” side by the extending portion 3113j. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions simulating stamens provided around the center in the first decoration portion 3151 simulating a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion that imitates a stamen located on the center line of the petal. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, A part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d so as to be fan-shaped diffused toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals in the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, so that FIG. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a side by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the reflection thereof. The light allows the petals to be illuminated and decorated brighter.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and the reflecting portions 3113e are arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e excludes a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the plate thickness of the main body part 3113a, the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface to the front side and emit the light from the front surface of the main body part 3113a to the front side. The light guide radiation plate 3113 according to the present embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side when viewed from the front side due to the presence of the plurality of reflection sections 3113e.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, it is possible to radiate light from substantially the entire front surface, so that the model is changed or the design is changed. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, the light guide radiation plate 3113 does not need to be changed, and the design change or the like can be easily dealt with, and the cost can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the first LED housing portion 3113c side provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. You can Further, the leg portion 3113f has a rear surface abutting the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along the side of the rear end of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f to the front.

The right slider front portion 3113h cooperates with a later-described right slider rear portion 3115d of the ornament base 3115 to form a right slider 3117.

Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the flange portion 3113b. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b that projects rearward from the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the light-guide and radiation plate 3113 can be removed from the back-and-back decorative substrate 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL up to 3114 (copper foil 3114d or electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent that.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes that penetrate the main body portion 3113a, so that the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the heat effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are compared with the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a or second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal influence on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. Further, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is close to and connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large, For the same reason as above, more heat from the first LED 3114a can be dissipated, and abrupt temperature rise can be further alleviated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a approaches the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. This allows heat to escape from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 through the gap, and suppresses the temperature rise in the back-rear decoration board 3114 to affect the heat. Can be reduced.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the front of the main body portion 3113a is substantially entirely covered by the reflection portion 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion of the main body portion 3113a where the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body part 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, so that the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the front metal decoration portion 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back decorative board of movable back decoration]
The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top view type second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. The back rear decorative substrate 3114 includes a plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154, etc.) provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c and forming a predetermined circuit pattern, respectively. It has an electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the rear decoration board 3114 has a notation part indicating the mounting components near the mounting components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and electronic component 3114e. have. The notation portion is provided on the coating film by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous.

The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap between the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 and the flange portion 3113b that is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b, The size is formed so as to be substantially constant. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to have a uniform size. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size to be housed inside the flange portion 3115b of the ornament base 3115.

In the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom. The light is provided toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration 3111d). As a result, the first LED 3114a in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151 can light-emit each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom.

In addition, at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions that are doubled in the decorative body 3111 are provided in each of the second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in the left and right. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 near the rear of 3111a. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in the left and right to emit light one by one.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central portion simulating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal of the first ornamental portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom. Thus, the second LED 3114b can light-embellish each of the five parts of the first decoration portion 3151 that imitate a stamen in the central portion.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, a portion imitating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is made to be closer than other portions. Can also emit light with high brightness, which can attract the player's attention. Therefore, in the light-emission decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion where the first LED 3114a emits light in a plane shape and a portion where the second LED 3114b emits light in a dot shape can be provided. A variety of light emitting effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate having a thickness slightly smaller than that of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (hatched portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is inwardly separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, a creeping distance EL or a space distance from a conductive member (for example, a metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) outside the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d is gained, and discharge of static electricity or the like occurs. The insulating property against short circuit can be enhanced, and the damage to the rear back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided up to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the copper foil 3114d can radiate heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. , And the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced in cooling effect to prevent damage due to heat.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has a predetermined area on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side so that light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the board body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. The light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is provided (region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f becomes lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted, and therefore, compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f. The angle of the light emitted from one LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f approaches an angle perpendicular to the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, and makes it easier to reflect the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side forward. You can

Further, as shown in FIG. 153(a) and the like, after the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (the amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide emission plate 3113 is increased to allow the back and rear movable ornament 3110 (the ornament 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be made to be brighter and lighter.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the inside of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a) and the like). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg portions 3113f is worn or rolled up, only the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is exposed and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is no such thing. Therefore, the insulation of the copper foil 3114d is lowered due to the exposure, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 150, etc., the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 of this embodiment is assembled into a back-and-back movable decorative body 3110, so that a flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will be described. Since 3113b and the outer periphery are doubly surrounded, it is difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. Further, the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. It can be prevented. In the present embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can cope with a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more, or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 by the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided in the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 can be illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of light emission, and it is possible to surely cause the rear-back movable decoration body 3110 to perform a desired light emission effect. Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear movable decoration can be seen. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

In addition, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are housed from the rear side with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front side, it is not necessary to apply a paint of a color such as white for making the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, It is possible to reduce the cost of the rear back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-6. Back base of movable decorative body]
The ornament base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat cover plate 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate 3115a, and the cover plate 3115a. A plurality of opening portions 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a in front view.

The cover plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed into a size. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (decoration body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the back side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the back decoration board 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the back decoration board 3114 from behind. Therefore, it is possible to prevent breakage of the rear back decoration substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and is located in front of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 at the front end. Is protruding so that it is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside to improve the appearance. Further, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted in the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long in the left and right and a portion that is open larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be affected. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d cooperates with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to configure the right slider 3117.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. .. This makes it easier to dissipate heat from the electronic component 3114e through the gap between the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of the back-back movable decoration]
Subsequently, main operation effects of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back-back movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body 3113. It is assembled by attaching the attachment boss 3111f of the ornamental body 3111 to the ornamental body base 3115 while sandwiching the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

The back rear movable decoration body 3110 has a transparent plate-shaped decoration body 3111, a first decoration protrusion 3111a, a second decoration protrusion 3111b, and a third decoration protrusion 3111c protruding forward, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with the hologram on which the picture pattern and the interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 is different from the decorative portion 3150. The three-dimensional effect can be imparted by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the lens effect by the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. With the hologram, a sense of depth can be added. As a result, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thin, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficient. It can be used to entertain the player.

Further, as described above, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a stereoscopic effect and a sense of depth. The back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. It is possible to provide the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back to facilitate the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 can be thinned, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging another decoration body. Therefore, by providing another decoration body, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, and a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy a variety of effects, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be further differentiated. can do.

The rear back movable ornament 3110 has a metal ornament 3111d made of metal foil on the front of the first ornament protrusion 3111a of the ornament 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first ornament 3151 and the second ornament 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous due to the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to the metal decoration portion 3111d and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 moves from the retracted position, which is invisible to the player, to the visible position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Since it is possible to give the player, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 flat and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. It is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the ornamental body 3111 and to make the ornament of the back rear movable ornamental body 3110 look large. In addition, since the back-back movable decoration 3110 has the decoration sheet 3112 having substantially the same size as that of the decoration 3111, the decoration of the back-back movable decoration 3110 is in a state in which the decoration is not framed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-back movable decoration object 3110, thereby creating an effect with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the game to a player and give the player a visual impact, thereby making it possible to entertain a large decoration and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first decorative LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front, and can suppress the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 from being deteriorated and sufficiently exert the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer circumference of each of the first decoration 3151 and the plurality of second decorations 3152, the first decoration 3151 is provided. Alternatively, the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually light-emittered. Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially light-emit a plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right, or to light-emit only a specific first decoration portion 3151 or second decoration portion 3152. By appropriately decorating the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

In addition, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is lit by the first LED 3114a of the side-view type within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and then radiated in a direction along the surface thereof. Since the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are illuminated and decorated, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide emission plate 3113. The distance to can be increased. Accordingly, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-back movable decorative body 3110 has a small thickness in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111. Also, the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly light-emitting decorated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light-emitting decoration. Further, since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the first LED 3114a of the side view type, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is configured to use the first LED 3114a as the side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is the top-view type, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the decoration portion 3150). In the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of (1), it is possible to add a portion that emits light in a dot shape with high brightness by the second LED 3114b to a portion that is light-emitting decorated in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to entertain the player more and to play the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light reception on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in a position close to the desired portion to be light-emitted and decorated by the first LED 3114a, it is possible to lighten and embody the desired portion more brightly, and a more dramatic effect. It is possible to entertain high-luminous decorations to the player.

Further, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing 3113c in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear side. Since the housing portion 3113d is included, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. Can be made as close as possible to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the thickness in the front-back direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are separated from each other. Since a gap is formed in the back side, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat.

In addition, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portions 3113f, and a plurality of openings are formed in the decoration base 3115. Since it has the portion 3115c, by raising and lowering the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, Also, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released to suppress the temperature rise of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114.

It should be noted that a temperature sensor is provided in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decoration substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. The frequency (probability) at which is executed may be increased. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled and the occurrence of defects due to heat can be suppressed.

Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decoration body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided and radiated by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is formed. It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, since the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c by the predetermined distance SL inside. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, enhance the insulating property against discharge of static electricity and the like, and prevent damage to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like.

In addition, in the rear-back movable decoration body 3110, the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Not not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same operational effect as described above can be achieved. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is smaller than that when the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs on the back-back decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved up and down (moved) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the driving of the back rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction is generated in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the body is moved up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 forming the surface of the movable back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are formed of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surface of the movable body 3110 and the decorative body base 3115 is reduced. Static electricity accumulated in the whole is difficult to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration part 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration part 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, static electricity is easily accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitted and decorated is entertained.

In addition, when the area of the metal decoration part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration part 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another Embodiment of Back-Movable Decorative Body]
Next, mainly with reference to FIG. 157, regarding the back-rear movable decoration body 3160, the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the back-rear movable decoration body 3180, and the like of an embodiment different from the above-mentioned back-rear movable decoration body 3110. The details will be described. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a rear-rear movable ornament different from the rear-rear movable ornament of FIG. 142, and FIG. 157(b) is a rear-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decorative body by a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 157(a), the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the front side with the decorative body 3161 and the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3162 on which a predetermined decoration is applied, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decoration sheet 3162 for radiating light in a direction along the front surface inside, and a light guide radiation plate. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light inside the 3163 in a direction along the front surface is mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (design) is printed. In this decorative sheet 3162, a low transparency portion of the decoration is located in front of the LED 3164a of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the rear surface. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference thereof is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only in a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It may be provided, or may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear rear decoration substrate 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear side in the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the rear back decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a position inside the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3164 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state, the back-back movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 abutting on the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. And the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 is thin in the front-rear direction. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-and-back decoration substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, which makes them difficult to see from the outside. And it looks good.

Since the rear back movable decoration body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the body portion 3161a of the decoration body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, a metal decoration portion on the front surface of the body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from the 3161c to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 (copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 to allow the back decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the above-mentioned back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, a decoration body base that covers the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3164 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back rear movable decoration body 3170 of the third embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b), is an outer decoration body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decoration body 3171 (frame A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped inner decorative body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiating plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decorative body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface inside in the forward direction. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3174 having a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface mounted on the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body portion 3171a extending in the front-rear direction, a support portion 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a, and a main body portion 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the inner decoration body 3172 is provided with a relief-like decoration having unevenness. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decorative body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the respective LED housing portions 3173a, which are individually determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect the light from a specific direction forward. Note that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It may be provided, or may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a portion inside the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 by a predetermined distance SL. In addition, the back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a coating film made of white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted in the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front side, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 are in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the light guide radiation plate 3173 and the back-rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 of the light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. Around the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 is thin in the front-rear direction. In the back-back movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the supporting portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174. In this back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-and-back decoration board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171, and their outer peripheral surfaces are externally exposed. To make it hard to see and to make it look good.

The back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decoration body 3171. Therefore, from the metal decoration portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body portion 3171a. The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the back rear decoration substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3174, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174. Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decoration substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back and rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c), has an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A rear decorative board 3183 having a light-transmitting inner decoration body 3182 that closes the inside) and a plurality of LEDs 3183a that are provided behind the inner decoration body 3182 and can emit light to the front side are mounted on the front surface. And are equipped with.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-back movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c which covers. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed such that the outer shape is smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap having a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface at a position inside the back rear decorative substrate 3183 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 has a coating film made of white solder resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 of this embodiment, the inner decoration body 3182 and the back rear decoration substrate 3183 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3181. In the back-back movable decoration body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decoration body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is connected to the outer decoration body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this rear-back movable decorative body 3180, the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is provided inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and Since the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative member 3182, the rear rear decorative substrate 3183 (from the metal rear portion 3181c The creepage distance EL to the foil can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c is prevented from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180, a decoration body base that covers the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back lower left production unit and lower back right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158(a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 158(b) is the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 is the rear left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable configuration of the lower back left effect unit and the lower lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 of the rear unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the rear rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 are positioned on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5. It is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the lower back left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left production unit 3200 is provided with a translucent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having an axial shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and is translucent. A back lower left decorative body 3202, a back lower left decorative substrate 3203 provided behind the lower lower left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a rear lower left decorative substrate 3203 And a back lower left rotation decoration 3201 is rotatably attached and a back lower left decoration 3202 is attached, and a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear effect production unit 3100. , Are provided.

Also, the lower back left production unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205 which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotary shaft projects rearward, and the rotary shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the drive gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3208. It includes a third transmission gear 3209 having a spur gear shape and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the lower back left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left decorative member 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower left decorative member 3202, the lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decoration 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower left rotation decoration 3201 on top of each other and rotating so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are full-color LEDs. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the driving gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left production unit 3200 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decoration 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower left production unit 3200 can cause the lower left left decorative body 3201 and the lower left decorative body 3202 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 emit light.

Next, the lower back right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 is provided behind the lower right rotation decorative body 3251 and a lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 having a light-transmitting property, which has an axial shaft 3251a protruding rearward. A lower back right decorative body 3252 having a back lower right decorative body 3252 and a rear lower right decorative board 3253 provided behind the lower lower right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a rear lower right decorative board 3253 And the lower back right decorative body 3251 is rotatably mounted and the lower right back decorative body 3252 is mounted, and a unit base 3254 mounted on the lower end of the right side of the rear rear effect unit 3100. , Are provided.

The lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower back right drive motor 3255 which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 such that the rotating shaft projects rearward, and the rotating shaft of the lower back right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that meshes with the drive gear 3256 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and a first transmission gear 3257 that mesh with each other. The second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the second transmission gear 3258 meshes with it and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251. The third transmission gear 3259 has a spur gear shape, and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decorative body 3252.

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right ornamental body 3252 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right ornamental member 3251 stacked on top of each other and rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

The back lower right decorative substrate 3253 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. The lower back right decorative board 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253. When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 and the lower right back decoration body 3252 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower right back decoration substrate 3253 emit light.

[5-9f. Underside production unit]
Next, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle raising/lowering mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is a rear lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the raising and lowering of the lower back inner decoration unit by the lower back middle elevating mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle rotating decorative body unit in the lower back middle rotating effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor by a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decoration unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-rear middle effect unit 3300 includes an under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 having an under-rear middle rotating decoration body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and an under-rear middle elevating mechanism for moving the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 up and down. 3350.

The shape of the inside-under-the-back decoration 3310 of the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 is a regular hexagon when viewed from the front. This back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape of "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a light-transmitting property. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a recess 3311 on the rear surface that can accommodate a diffusing lens 3321, a first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, which will be described later. Have

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the diffusing lens 3321 and the diffusing lens 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is attached to the diffusion lens 3321 so as to sandwich the rear lower middle protruding decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape. The board fixing member 3323 having the shaft portion 3323a and the shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is relatively rotatably inserted are provided. And a base 3324.

In addition, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a region detection piece 3325 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extending in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 projecting from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324 and has an opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and is transparent. A back under middle decoration 3328 having, a back under middle second decoration board 3329 provided behind the under back middle decoration 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a back under middle second decoration board 3329 A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that are attached to the front surface of the second detecting board 3329 that can detect the area detecting pieces 3325, and a position specifying piece that can detect the position detecting pieces 3326 that are attached to the front surface of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329. And a sensor 3331.

In addition, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back middle decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the lower back middle decoration body 3328 is attached. A movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332 such that the rotation shaft projects forward, and a rotation shaft of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And a slide slider 3336 that is vertically slidably guided by a slide rail 3360.

The front end sides of the diffusing lens 3321, the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are, in an assembled state, located between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotation base 3324, and It is accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the rotary decoration body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, the portion of the numbered decoration (relief) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be illuminated. The LEDs on the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 are full-color LEDs. Further, the LED on the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 is a full-color LED.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168( a ), the area detection piece 3325 displays “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310. Through the numeral decoration, a circular arc is formed within a range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

Each of the plurality (here, six) of the position detection pieces 3326 projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on the circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. Each of the position detection pieces 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and the adjacent A distance of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis as a center (see FIG. 168(a)). ..

A plurality (here, three) of the area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of clockwise, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged to display the decorations “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 immediately above the center of rotation in the areas “3”, “4”, and “5”. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a protruding rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

This under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the under-rear middle rotating decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear middle rotating drive motor 3333. You can In addition, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, respectively, thereby causing the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 to emit light. Also, the underbody decoration 3328 can be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, etc., the under-bottom middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 that extends in the left-right direction and has both ends attached to the under-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the under-bottom right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 which is attached to the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the flat bottom which is attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 and partially faces the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 is meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and is provided with an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached at the upper center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3351.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. To the first slit 3357a and the second slit 3357b, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip of the unit base 3351. And a lower back intermediate relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the back-and-bottom-middle elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevator slit 3359a through which an elevator pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 of the ornamental body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 attached to the front surface of the ornamental body unit 3320, the elevator unit 3320 moves up and down. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front side). And a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction with respect to the view.

The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to a lower part on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached such that the base end is to the right of the elevating cam gear 3356 and is at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has its tip end side extending to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle decoration board 3322, a lower back middle decoration board 3329, a region specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lift drive motor. 3352 relays the connection between the lower back middle up-and-down detection sensor 3358a and the production drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and an elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-and-lower-in-and-under-elevation drive motor 3352, the back-and-bottom-under-elevation mechanism 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the up-and-down cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b, which revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356, can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the elevating pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 that are slidably inserted in the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the under-rear middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-rear inside effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 is in the state of the lowered position where the in-under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowermost position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the lower-bottom-under-elevation mechanism 3350 is positioned such that the tip side is below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip is under-under-the-back relay substrate 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of its revolution, and is located near the proximal end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a. .. More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3356b and the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the spring 3362 exerts an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the force line of the urging force causes the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arms 3357 and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked and the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be viewed well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in a normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost side is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle first. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emission decoration (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are passed. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm moves. The tip end side of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. Then, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved upward through the elevating pin 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, in the up-and-down arm 3357, since the spring 3362 exerts a biasing force in the clockwise direction, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, and The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back-and-lower center up-and-down drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is performed. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves to the uppermost position.

When the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the force of rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b that is in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the lift arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

In addition, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. Accordingly, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to rotate. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In a state in which the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) from rebounding from the outside to the front (player). All the number decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 201).

To return the lower back inside decoration unit 3320 to the lowered position from the raised position, rotate the drive gear 3353 in the opposite direction to the lower back lower drive motor 3352 to move the lifting arm 3357. Rotates counterclockwise to move the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 from the raised position downward. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay substrate 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352. , The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the normal lowered position (further, the center of the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a is prevented from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501)). The bounce preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where the pachinko machine 1 overlaps when viewed from the front.

In the back under-center production unit 3300 according to the present embodiment, the drive gear 3334 is rotated by the under-under-medium rotary drive motor 3333 in the under-under-medium ornamental body unit 3320, so that the under-medium intermediate rotating ornament 3310 is rotated via the rotary gear 3327. Can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333 in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the lower back middle rotating body unit 3320.

In the under-rear center production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality (here, 6) of numerical decorations in the under-rear mid-rotation decorative body 3310 is located immediately above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168( a ), in the state where the numeral decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located on the upper side, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is set to the first area specifying portion. The position detection sensor 3331 detects a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 while detecting by the three region specification sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second region specification sensor 3330b, and the third region specification sensor 3330c. Is not detecting.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c cause the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 to move. Is being detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of "2" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of "4" is the range of the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located inside.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b do not detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects, the numeral decoration of "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a does not detect, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "6" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

In this way, by the combination of the detection/non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, any of the numeral decorations has a stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not the vehicle is located in the stop area including the area.

Since the back-under-center rotation driving motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the back-under-center rotation driving is performed. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it becomes possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a stop position of a desired numeral decoration, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 stop at desired positions. In the case of the combination satisfying the positions, the position specifying sensor 3331 is displaced from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees, and therefore the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detecting piece 3326, the position detecting piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position identification sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is the origin. Then, from there (from the origin), when it rotates by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, and a desired number is obtained. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is described by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 including a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is further rotated by 13 steps in a state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 are in a combination satisfying a desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 is The position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detecting away from the position specifying sensor 3331. By stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected as an origin and is rotated 20 steps, a desired numeral decoration is stopped. Can be stopped exactly in position.

Next, the light emitting decoration in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs for allowing the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 to emit light to decorate the under-rear rotation decoration member 3310. It is provided with a decorative substrate 3322 and a second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations on the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, and each numeral decoration can be independently illuminated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3329 are located behind a portion of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 that is outside the plurality of numeral decorations. The periphery can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the inside-under-representation unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the inside-under-revolving decorative body 3310 by the three area specifying sensors 3330 to some extent, and therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensor 3330. By rotating a plurality of LEDs of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light, only a specific number decoration is illuminated, or each number decoration is illuminated in a different color to rotate. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

Further, in the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the relevant portion of the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002. In addition, when the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the LED of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is caused to emit light (or one emission mode is selected from a plurality of emission modes to emit light). ).

As described above, according to the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this enables the region detection of the length across the three stop positions in the rotating inside-the-back-under-the-back decorative body 3310 having the six stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating the process, all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not undetected until the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. With the combination of the area specifying sensors 3330 that are present, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

Then, since the back-under-center rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with the six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the three-side area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detection pieces 3325 to rotate the back-side middle rotation. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by the one position specifying sensor 3331, and the shift of the stop position can be detected. The stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped by reducing the number as much as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player by strongly rotating, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is supposed to rotate about the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, a roulette wheel that stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating around. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to any stop position is , The number of stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, and the ability (the grasp of stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The present invention is not limited to this, and the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 170(b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation decorative body unit in the back production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and seen from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back-up/down lifting/decorating body unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decorative body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation ornamental body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state in which the back up/down lifting decorative body unit in the back up production unit is moved to the appearance position.

The back production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back production unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back side production unit 3400 includes a back side front rotating decoration body 3410 having an axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back side front rotating decoration body 3410. A back upper front decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right direction in which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center of the left and right direction, and a back upper side which is provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface A front decoration board 3422 and a back front decoration board 3422 are provided behind the back front decoration board 3422 and a back front decoration body 3421 is attached to the front surface thereof to rotatably support an axial shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decoration body 3410. And a unit base 3423 that operates.

In addition, the back production unit 3400 is provided between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the rear surface of the rear base 3424 and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis on the front side. Back front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426. A rotary gear 3427, which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-side front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back-side front decorative substrate 3422. And a back rotation detection sensor 3428 that is attached to the rear surface of the rotation gear 3427 and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the back production unit 3400 includes a back elevation drive motor 3429 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back elevation drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrate the rear cover 3424. An elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424, which has a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a. , The rear upper/lower detection sensor 3432 mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper front decorative substrate 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the vertical cam gear 3431, and the rear side rear decorative ornament 3440 are provided on the front end side of the vertical cam gear 3431. So that the drive pin 3431b revolves up and down, the base end side is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and the back up and down decoration unit 3450. A spring 3433 that urges the tip end side 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip end side moves upward and a rear cover 3424 are attached to the rear side, and regulate the upward movement of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450. And a rod-shaped restricting member 3434 that operates.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back-up/down decoration unit 3450 includes a back-up rear decoration in which an axial shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 penetrates in the center. A body 3451, a back-up rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear decoration body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back-up rear decoration body 3451 from the back of the back-up rear decoration board 3452. And a lifting unit base 3453 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423 and rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3440a of the rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440.

Also, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 includes a back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 such that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up rear rotation drive motor 3454. Drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 engaged with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. And a second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. And a rotary gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-and-up elevation decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevation unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458 from the rear side. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up rendering unit 3400 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back front decorative body 3421, the back front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear side. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover. The back front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotation decoration 3410 stacked in front and back at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals are between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was rotated to be located at. The back upper front decorative body 3421 has a light-transmitting property as a whole.

The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length in the left and right direction of the back upper front decorative body 3421. By illuminating the LED of the front back decoration substrate 3422, the front back rotation decoration 3410 and the front back decoration 3421 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back upper lift detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is formed in an arc shape in which the cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 are coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotating decorative body 3410. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the upper and lower lifting decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by the back-side rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semi-circular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the rear upper/lower elevating decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up lifting detection sensor 3432 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward.

The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The shaft shaft 3440a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 passes through the back rear decorative body 3451, the back rear decorative substrate 3452, and the lifting unit base 3453, and then the lifting unit base 3453. Extends to the rear side. The rear back decoration 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the rear back rotation decoration 3440 stacked one on top of the other and then rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was made. The back rear decorative body 3451 is entirely transparent.

The back-up rear decorative board 3452 can cause the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light so that the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be illuminated. The LEDs on the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are full-color LEDs.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And an elongated hole-shaped slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. On the front surface of the motor cover 3460, decoration imitating a cherry blossom is formed.

Next, the movement of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back production unit 3400 detects the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decorative body 3410 by the back rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotary ornament 3410 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the front back rotation drive motor 3425, the back front rotation ornamental body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 is provided on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the front end side is It is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the portion of the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 that projects to the left of the back front decorative body 3421 is located in the rear of the back front left effect unit 3700 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is located below the center of its revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453 of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 and the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is exerted to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip end side moves downward due to the own weight of the back up/down elevating body unit 3450, that force Since the force line passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lift unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper lift decorative body unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up/down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-forth lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back up/down drive motor 3429, the elevator cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshed with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the front end side of the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is moved downward by its own weight.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above a straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. The slit 3453b slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. The revolution of the is stopped.

This stops the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 via the lifting/lowering unit base 3453, so that the front end side of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 including the back/up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is fixed. , And the appearance position is moved to a position lower than the back-up front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, since the front end side is located below the center vicinity of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 and below the back front decorative body 3421, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It becomes possible.

In the state where the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of further rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the rear upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves further downward. In addition, the weight of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up/down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

It should be noted that in the state in which the back-and-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is attempted to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-front lifting/decorating body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In a state where the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back up rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up/down lifting decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, by rotating the driving gear 3455 by the back-up rear rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be made visible. ..

When the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the back up/down driving motor 3429 rotates the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above so that the drive pin 3431b of the up/down cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the front end side of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back up/down drive motor 3429 is stopped to move the back up/down decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. Can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and lifts the back up/down. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back production unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the rear upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the rear upper front decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is provided at the rear of the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decoration board 3452 appropriately emit light. By doing so, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be light-emitted.

At this time, the LED on the back rear decorative board 3452 is caused to emit light in a state where the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, so that the back up rear rotating decoration that is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the rear back decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Left rear production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. 178(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 178(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 182 is a rear rear left decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear left decorative body unit in the back-rear left effect unit.

The rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the rear box 3010 and in front of the left side of the rear rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 has a translucent back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back that rotatably supports the back-rear left rotation decoration 3510 at the lower end side. A rear left decorative body unit 3520 and a rear rear left driving unit 3550 that is mounted in the rear case 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. ..

The back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The back-rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a rear rear left decoration body 3521 and a rear rear left decoration body 3521 in which an axial shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotation decoration body 3510 penetrates in the center. A rear rear left decoration board 3522 provided behind the rear surface of the rear surface 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a rear rear decoration board 3522 mounted from the rear of the rear rear left decoration board 3522 to the rear side of the rear rear decoration body 3521. , A front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear-rear-left-turning decorative body 3510, and is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side is rotatable with the rear-rear-left drive unit 3550. And a movable base 3524 attached thereto.

In addition, the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 such that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

The back-rear left decoration body 3521 of the back-rear left decoration body unit 3520 has a light-transmitting property, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3510 are overlapped in the front and rear and then rear. The petals on the side are formed so as to be rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the rear rear left decoration substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle from the upper left of the portion to the upper side. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side thereof extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3524b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

This rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520 rotates the rear-rear-left rotation drive motor 3525 to rotate the drive gear 3526, and moves the rear-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back rear left decoration unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and mounted in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3552, and a rotation on the upper front surface of the unit cover 3553. A rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 mounted such that its shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear rear-rear left up-down drive motor 3554 3555 and.

The rear rear left drive unit 3550 is also a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a, and an elevating cam gear A drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending left and right, and a left and right lower portion of the first slit 3558a. The operation pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520. Has a second slit 3558b slidably inserted therein, and a link member 3558 slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A back rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the back side 3553, and a back rear left up and down detection sensor 3562 attached to the back surface of the back rear left relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the up and down cam gear 3557; Equipped with.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520.

The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

In the elevating cam gear 3557, the drive pin 3557b penetrates the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 which penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a provided near the upper end and a second slit 3558b provided at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear back left relay substrate 3561 relays the connection between the rear rear left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554, the rear rear left up/down detection sensor 3562, and the performance drive substrate 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear left effect unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back-rear left effect unit 3500 has a back-rear left decorative body 3510 provided with a back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184(a). The unit 3520 is in a state of a retracted position in which the unit 3520 hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

Further, in a normal state assembled in the game board 5, most of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). It should be noted that the portion of the rear-side left-left-elevation drive motor 3554 that faces the front is covered with a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and thus the player It is invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left lift detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located on the right side of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is The link member 3558 is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is biased by the spring 3559 in the direction of moving upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. In addition to rotating, the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the up/down cam gear 3557 and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557 to prevent the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3558a is pressed upward and the inside of the first slit 3558a is slid rightward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operation pin 3524b of the movable rear base 3524 of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520, which protrudes below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a, moves upward due to the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a while the operation pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and 184(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the upward movement of the link member 3558 to reduce the load on the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554.

In this way, the rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, whereby the rear-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end moves to the right. While moving upward while the back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-rear left effect unit 3700, it becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear-rear left-right lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise rotation of the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184(c). See)). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

When the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 causes a force to rotate the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 in a clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a, and the force acts on the movable base. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve and the lift cam gear 3557 does not rotate, the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left up and down drive motor 3554 through the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557 and the like.

In the state where the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the drive pin 3557b abuts on the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decoration unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight and the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3524b, The force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the elevating cam gear 3557 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

In the state in which the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear rear left rotating decoration body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the rear-rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see Figure 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is visible from the front side (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 is used to set the motor gear 3555 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3557b of the ascending/descending cam gear 3557, the link member 3558 can be moved downward, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. The position can be restored.

Since the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 as shown in FIG. 183. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear back left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear rear left decoration 3521 can be illuminated. At this time, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LEDs of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 are caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back rear left decoration 3521 which are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right rear production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. 185(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 185(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 is a rear rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear right decorative body unit in the back-rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 which has a light-transmitting property and is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a rear portion which rotatably supports the rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 at a lower end side. A rear right decorative body unit 3620 and a rear rear right driving unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. ..

The back-rear right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back-rear right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back rear right decorative body 3621 in which the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center and a back rear right decorative body. A back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back of the 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back rear right decorative board 3622 from the rear to the back right decorative body 3621 The front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear-rear right-turning decorative body 3610, and the rear cover is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3623 and the upper end side is rotatable to the rear-rear right drive unit 3650. And a movable base 3624 attached thereto.

In addition, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. And a gear-shaped rotating gear 3627.

The back-rear right decoration body 3621 of the back-rear right decoration body unit 3620 has a light-transmitting property, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610 are overlapped in the front and rear and then rear. The petals on the side are formed so as to be rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The LEDs on the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decoration body 3621 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle from the upper right of the portion to the upper side. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangle. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3624b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the operation pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right ornamental unit 3620 moves the rear rear right revolution ornament 3610 through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear rear right decoration unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and is installed in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper portion is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652; A rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

The rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right in which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b which extends left and right below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. And a link member 3658 mounted slidably in the up and down direction.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a plate-shaped partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of 3653, and a back rear right up and down detection sensor 3662 attached to the back surface of the back rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the up and down cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652, and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 by the drive pin 3657b penetrating the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear rear right up/down detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a provided near the upper end and a second slit 3658b provided at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decoration board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, and the back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a rear-rear right decorative body 3610 provided with a rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right performance unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

Further, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the entire front (player side). Since it is invisible.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 and is located near the right end of the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3624b located on the left side of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged by the spring 3659 in a direction in which the link member 3658 moves upward. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right lifting drive motor 3654, the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated. The drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3658a is pressed upward while sliding leftward in the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operation pin 3624b of the movable rear base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below the support shaft 3651a and leftward is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a while the operation pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 retracts. It rotates in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3659 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658, thereby reducing the load on the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654.

In this way, the rear-rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. By moving to the upper side, the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear right decorative body unit 3620 is at the turning position when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state (the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191(c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force moves. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve and the lifting cam gear 3657 does not rotate, the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

In addition, even when the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated in the clockwise direction to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. Accordingly, when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a by its own weight and the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b, The force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to be rotatable in the state of the second appearance position.

In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 is visible from the front side (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back rear right rotation decoration 3610 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 sets the motor gear 3655 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, the link member 3658 can be moved downward, and with the movement of the link member 3658 downward, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the back rear right decoration unit 3620. The position can be restored.

Since the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 190, By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decoration substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be illuminated and decorated. At this time, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LED of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 that are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192(b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is one rear front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 195(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 195(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 such that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 is, in order from the top, three back front left decorations of a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back-front left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. -Shaped shutter support member 3712 and the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712, and each is rotatably supported about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3730.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and has a transparent front flat back decoration member 3713 and a back front left decoration member 3713. A rear front left decorative board 3714 provided on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear rear left effect unit attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the rear front left decorative board 3714 from the rear side. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front surface of the 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and the support plate 3716 are attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3719 and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction to open/close the shutter unit 3730 by rotating the link member 3719 are provided.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape such that the “convex” shape is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 of the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b which projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left-right direction, and a left-hand side after protruding in the axis-perpendicular direction from the tip of the left-side shaft portion 3733. And a crank shaft 3734 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3733.

Since the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is provided with a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo, etc. according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back-front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the front left decorative substrate 3714 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716, which is bent to the right on the front end side, is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion is protruded rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can be rotated around the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side and a second connection portion connected to the opening/closing slider 3720 with a portion into which the support pin 3716a is inserted. The connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The open/close slider 3720 extends vertically with a height substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the front left production unit 3700 will be described. In a normal state, the back front left effect unit 3700 is in a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface facing forward as shown in FIG. The shutter 3732 closes the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear left front decorative body 3713 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In a normal state, the front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger is projected downward by the urging force of the spring. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

When the front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON) in this normal state, the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, by the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719, the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b moves downward.

By moving the opening/closing slider 3720 downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter shaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732 and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is provided. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, the back left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left production unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

In addition, since the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decoration body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is closed, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are made to emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, by causing a plurality of LEDs on the left front back decoration substrate 3714 to emit light, the left front front decorated with light emission is illuminated. The ornamental body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decoration unit units: a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. Since the shutter units 3730 can be independently opened and closed, and the lights of the 3710 can be decorated, a variety of effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 196(b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is one rear front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 199(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199 is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in an open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 such that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. .. The back front right effect unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, a first back front right decoration body unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration body unit 3810C, in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back-front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating forward and backward, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. -Shaped shutter support member 3812, and the shutter support member 3812 is vertically arranged in a row on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 and is rotatably supported around a horizontal axis so that the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and has a translucent flat plate-shaped back front right decoration 3813 and the back front right decoration 3813. A rear front right decorative board 3814 provided on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear rear right effect unit attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the rear front right decorative board 3814 from the rear side. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front surface of the 3600.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a transmission member 3818 attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open/close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed such that the outer shape is a shape in which a “convex” character is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably supports the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 of the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b which projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and the support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a column shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-hand side after protruding from the tip of the right-side shaft portion 3833 in the axis-perpendicular direction. And a crank shaft 3834 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crank shaft 3834 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3833.

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back-front right decorative body 3813 is provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back-front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing leftward and rightward, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816 that is bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion passes through the right side of the shutter support member 3812 and projects rearward. There is. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back-front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back-front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the support pin 3816a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion into which the support pin 3816a is inserted, and a second connecting portion 3820 connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. The connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The open/close slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199(a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state in which its plate surface faces forward, The shutter 3832 is in a closed state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front side (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear front right decoration 3813 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger is projected downward by the biasing force of the spring. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

When the open/close slider 3820 moves downward, the crank shaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is provided. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by turning off the back right drive solenoid 3817 (OFF), the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, from the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 to the back front right decoration 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back-front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back-front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back-front right decorative board 3814 are made to emit light. The player can see the shutter unit 3830 which is light-emitted and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in an open state, by making a plurality of LEDs of the right front back decoration substrate 3814 emit light, the right-embodied back front is decorated. The ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right production unit 3800, three back front right decoration units, a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 can be independently opened/closed and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the under-rear-center rotating decorative body of the under-rear-center production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows that the back-up rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the rear-rear left effecting unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-rear right. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the rear right rotation ornamental body of the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows that the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative member of the rear-rear right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 205 shows the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the rear rear left effect unit. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decoration body of the back lower middle rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved from the lowered position to the raised position.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back front left decoration unit 3020 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed. Decorative body 3201, back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 of back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 of back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and back top of back rendering unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, and the like can be visually recognized well, and the center role object 2500. Through the inside of the frame, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is connected to the right rail 1005 from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000. It is located along the right middle unit 2700. Further, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible to the player.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, behind the center of the side unit 2200 and the left general winning opening 2001, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is positioned below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in a lowered position, and is positioned behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 so that the upper portion thereof projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees this back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 from a diagonally upper position, the numeral decoration above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen well.

Further, the back front decorative body 3421 of the back production unit 3400 extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper left part from the center in the left-right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. It can be seen through 2500, and the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen. The back-up/down decorative body unit 3450 having the back-up/rear rotating decoration body 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position, which is behind the back-up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back-rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player. Further, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 of the back-rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the inner side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. In the front view, most of the lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the right part is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decoration units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the upper first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the front view, the second rear front right decorative body unit 3810B on the inner side and the third rear front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from the left side of the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

In the game board 5, the back unit production of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700. , And the back front right effect unit 3800 perform a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the rear-side effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the rear-side drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 is moved. The lock by is released, and the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. This allows the player to show the effect (movable effect) in which the large back-back movable decorative body 3110 that crosses the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the rear-rear movable ornament. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the normal/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed to move the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 via the slide guide 3130 to the upper and lower sides of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear rear The movable decorative body 3110 can be paid attention to, and the movement of the rear movable movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and at the same time, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player as much as possible. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Soroku", and the number of the number decoration of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating. Depending on, the "piece" may be advanced. As a result, the player is harassed depending on whether or not the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "box". It can be exciting and entertaining the player. Further, the player can make the player feel as if the expected value is increasing by advancing the "pieces", and can increase the expectation of the game.

As an effect using the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250, the upper effect unit 3400, the rear left effect unit 3500, and the rear right effect unit 3600 in the reverse unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotating decoration 3201, and in the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower right driving motor 3255 rotates the back lower right rotating decoration. Rotate 3251. In the back production unit 3400, the back front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back front rotation decoration body 3410, and the back elevation drive motor 3429 moves the back elevation work unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time as turning to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500, the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 moves the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the slightly upper right first appearance position, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 drives the rear rear. The left-hand rotation decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 moves the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the slightly upper left first appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotation decorative body 3610 is rotated.

As a result, the back upper back rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510, and the back right rotating decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the back lower left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper back rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, respectively. By rotating the six ornaments, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game as if something good will happen.

At this time, the back up/down elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554, and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 are appropriately repeated in the normal/reverse rotation to set the back up/down elevating decoration unit 3450, the back rear left adornment. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510, and the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, since the seven ornaments rotate around, it is possible to strongly suggest to the player that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510. Also, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right lifting/lowering drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation driving motor 3625 drives the back rear right. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at a position approximately at the height, and there is something good that surprises the player. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the rear-rear left-handed rotation decoration body 3510 and the rear-rear-right rotation decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are the eyes of the face of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. You may make it display the effect image which becomes a position. As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the eyes of the character are spinning, and entertain the player.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 causes the shutter unit 3730 to operate the shutter unit 3730 in the back front left effect unit 3700. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 changes the shutter unit 3830 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, and therefore the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right. The decoration of the ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed respectively, and a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 that are opened and closed. As a result, various effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

The back unit production unit 3100, the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower middle production unit 3300, the back production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all ornaments and the like may be movable. This allows
By moving all the ornaments, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) will occur, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the advantageous game state. In this case, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 and the rear rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each ornament is described, but when each ornament is moved, the LED of the decoration substrate provided at the rear is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the player can perform the light emission effect of the ornament. It can be shown and can further attract the player's interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the movable effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to use various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main operation effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above configuration will be described. In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the game area 5a is distributed with a distribution area in which the game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is formed into a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112, is divided into an impossible non-circulation region, and the front end is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow area and the inner side becomes the non-flow area, by definition. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503, which is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is extended from the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side (inside). Together with the peripheral wall portion 2501, the flange portion 2502 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the distribution area side (outer side). Since nothing is extended to the distribution region side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided in the above, it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 as possible. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-circulation area (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged to thereby prevent the distribution. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided in the rear of the area, the movable body of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the like can be made more visible, and the game balls B in the distribution area and the non-distribution area. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the above effects.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inner side) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion can be formed by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (abuts on) a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by mounting the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B contacts. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall portion 2501 and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the support part 2503 extending from the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be made hard to see, and the support part 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided at the rear through the accessory 2500 and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area. It is possible to increase the range in which the effect images, movable bodies, decorations, etc., that are provided in the rear of the display area can be made larger, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the effect of the effect by the effect device, and to be provided in the rear of the non-distribution area. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body, the decorative object, and the like are large, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion provides light for illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, and transmit light from the light emitting means (such as the LED and the effect display device 1600), so that the transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are flickered. It is possible to make it look lively, improve appearance, and enhance appeal to the player. At this time, steps or cutouts may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in the movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support part 2503. By the light emission from the light emitting means (LED), the above-described effects can be obtained, and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is formed in the game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is extended with the same thickness as 1100, and the support unit 2503 is behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the rendering device (rendering display device 1600. Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and a part behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the rendering image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Visibility can be improved, and the front left decoration 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

Further, at least a part of the tip side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall part 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is seen, and it seems that details are taken into consideration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip end side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and different at that portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be improved by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make an illusion like that, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support portion 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (in the middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction, the rear portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficiently increased. It is possible to keep it, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact therewith.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped so as to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made invisible by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500 is a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall part 2501 is It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good-looking pachinko inside the game area 5a. The machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-circulation area, the movable body and the decoration of the effect unit, etc. can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of production by the above.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected more forward than the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to easily recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and in a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide the support part 2503 extending to the non-circulation area side (inside), the support part 2503 disturbs the visibility of the production device (the production display device 1600 or the production unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be increased, and the effect of the effect of the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect device for the player can be achieved. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded to form a metal. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is different from other parts. It is possible to prevent the difference in shrinkage amount from increasing, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a flat-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. , Rear and rear right/left raising/lowering drive motors 3554 and back/right/right producing unit 3600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, as functional parts of the rear/left rear producing unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, respectively. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, the back rear left. The front front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least a portion of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Since the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, Through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, it is possible to make the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 invisible to the player, and thus the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the back side left/right lifting drive motor 3554 and the back/right rear lifting/lowering drive motor 3654, and the front back left decoration 3030 and back front right decoration 3040 can be seen, The appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a divided by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 becomes difficult to understand, and therefore the outer periphery of the game region 5a is not divided. It is possible to give a sense of openness by looking like, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger. Therefore, since the game area 5a looks larger than the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, the expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and the game can be played. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

In addition, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are arranged to cover at least a portion in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same effects as described above, the functional parts can be made invisible even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in front view, the back front extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a Since the decorations of the left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the region 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. It is possible to make the player more prominent and appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being visible, and it is good to see the back-rear left effect unit 3500 and the back-rear right effect unit 3600 etc. from the player side through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the pachinko machine 1 and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the front view, at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a (in the rear back left lift drive motor 3554). Since it is arranged completely (entirely outside the game area 5a), in order to arrange the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a The rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By keeping the balance, it is possible to prevent the space in the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in a front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. Therefore, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described operational effects can be provided. Further, by providing a part of the driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased, and in that case. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from, and it is possible to make it look as if the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 You can improve the appearance of. Further, although the opaque decoration seal 3032 and the decoration seal 3042 are provided on the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040, the respective bases 3031 of the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are provided. Also, since the base 3041 (which may include the decoration seal 3032 and the decoration seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is used as the front left decoration 3030 or the back. It is possible to reach the front right decoration 3040 and give an impression that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back-front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it is understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It will be spicy and can look like a piece of decoration. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be obtained without making the back front left decoration 3030 sized so as to cover the entire back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 can be obtained. It is possible to make the game area 5a look large while reducing the cost required for 3030. It should be noted that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654, but the part is a pachinko machine. It is preferable that the area is closer to the center of 1 (closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, a predetermined location where the drive source is not located outside the game area 5a (a location such as a lower left location in FIG. 131, that is, a location at a lower left corner of the game board 5) extends from within the gaming area 5a to outside the gaming area 5a. By providing a decorative body, the game area 5a can be made large.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Moreover, since the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are made to extend to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back-front left decoration is inside the door window 101a. It is possible to hide the rear back left production unit 3500, the rear rear right production unit 3600, and the like behind the front 3030 and the front front right decorative body 3040, and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside of the door window 101a in the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decoration 3030 is used to lift the back front left lift. Even if the drive motor 3554 is not entirely covered, the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from being unnecessarily long. It is possible to reduce the cost of the front left decoration 3030 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is provided with translucent decoration. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting opening 2002 than to the general winning opening 2001, and the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting opening 2002 is decreased (or the first starting is started). It is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002, and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player and suppress a decrease in interest, and to surely recognize the position of the first starting opening 2002 that the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting opening 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is received in the first starting opening 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, Depending on whether or not the winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous game state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be excited and excited, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the first special lottery result is not drawn. As a result, the player will not be discouraged, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a seal is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating, and entertain the player with the pachinko machine 1 to reduce the excitement. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decrease in interest. Moreover, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are emitted. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Thus, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided to the rear later than the game ball B accepted in 2001, the game ball B accepted in the first starting port 2002 in which the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning a prize port 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superior feeling) due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game for a longer period of time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since it can be discharged to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, to direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and to promote the game quickly and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Since it is possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, it is possible to give the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player. As a result, the game can be kept entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning is achieved. It is possible to omit decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of the general winning opening 2001, and by turning that amount to a production device or the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 of the back lower middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back lower middle rotation having a plurality of (here, six) stop positions at even positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions, and a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of (here, four) sensors including a plurality (here, three) of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 are sequentially increased from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease when the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated, the repetition is repeated. Therefore, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325.

More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the number of the area detection pieces 3325 is half. And the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325 at the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”). When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “1”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detection, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detection, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number of "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detection, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the detection and non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above are repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, by combining the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330, the underside middle rotation decoration is performed. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection until the back inside rotating ornamental body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the middle-turn ornament 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 of the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 are detected. After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the shift of the stop position.

In addition, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), entertaining the effect (moving effect) by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and suppressing a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player by strongly rotating, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in the front, and it is freely rotated after rotating. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to the arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasp of stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle effect unit 3300, the one having six stop positions is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) has been described as rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As the "circulating", "moving in a straight line", "moving in an arc", "moving in a curved line", etc. may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I/O port as input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a second The second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting opening 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first big winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 Out-out sensor 3053, a first sub-out sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, a second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B in the second sub-out port 2012, And, the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2418. 2612, or the like, or output a drive signal from the main control I/O port to the function display unit 1400 status display unit, normal symbol display unit, ordinary hold display unit, first special symbol display unit, first special hold number display The drive signal is output to the container, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

Further, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the outlet 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used as the outlet sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

In addition, the main control MPU sends various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launch solenoid 542, and a ball feed solenoid 145 that performs a ball feed control. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and a ball removing switch for starting the ball removing operation is provided. ..

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various types of information (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of payout commands in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the device being input through the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, the fact that the "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number “7” is displayed, the fact that “CR is not connected” (the electric connection is cut off at any position from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, it is informing that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 by a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit to output a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 206, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side drive emission data, which is composed of a door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided in the frame, is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I/O port. To the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 operates based on the operation signal. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 462 provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. Signal, 2.1 ch surround signal, or 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are output by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600 for display. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

The display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral controller 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The “line buffer method” means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the image RAM having a high access speed and copied, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the case where various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superimposing order”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scanning in the direction intersecting with the one direction sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line operation from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously recorded in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest part, while abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and thus the first probability is high. Accepted in the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 within the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the center character 2500 is guided. The plurality of passages 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. The second guide passage 2522 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with a strength that abuts on the hitting portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not abut the hitting portion 1006 (a right-handed hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength slightly weaker than that), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through this gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is carried out on the main control board 1310, and when the drawn ordinary lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting opening 2004 in 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out opening 2012, there is no opportunity to be received in the second special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second big winning opening 2006, the second of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted into the starting opening 2004 or the first special winning opening 2005, and the material is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, and thus the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received at the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B in the second sub-out opening 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. That is, rather than "right hitting" in which the game ball B abuts on the hitting portion 1006, a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182 can be prompted, and a driving operation of the game ball B can be performed. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 which is mainly.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing through the left side of the above, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B discharged to the side of the first attacker unit 2400 through the left side of the second special winning opening 2006 is the first shelf portion 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf portion 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first special winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and into the game area 5a. Is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “ordinary winning”, and the second starting door is When 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes "win" is drawn.

Further, while the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result is selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit"), the first special winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening/closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Then, the game ball B is ready to be received. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B while the first special winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player Can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate “middle hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time shortening (time shortening) hit” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, which is also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " There are "probability change short time hit", "probability no short time hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the first big winning. If any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern that makes the game balls B in an unacceptable closed state (one opening/closing pattern is 1 (Called a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, an advantageous gaming state advantageous for the player is generated.

In "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first special winning opening 2005 makes it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the advantageous game state is ST (special).・Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a state of probable variation or shortening during a predetermined number of times of variation.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the result of the special lottery that has been drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special control result is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the LEDs that are turned on after blinking a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning on and off.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that three or more picture strings each consisting of a pattern are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each picture string is changed to display the variably displayed picture string. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective patterns are stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. Lower left performance unit 3200, lower back right performance unit 3250, lower back middle performance unit 3300, upper back performance unit 3400, back rear left performance unit 3500, back rear right performance unit 3600, back front left performance unit 3700, and front front. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800 and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the set board 8 of the island equipment in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1, it assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand by and prevents it from falling. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting member 7 is formed by using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Accordingly, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-back direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, whereby the self-supporting auxiliary member is attached to the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. .. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

It should be noted that the mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, and may be "by inserting a projection into a hole" or "of nails". It may be "by locking", "by magnetizing by magnet", "by hook-and-loop fastener", "by suction cup", "by peelable adhesive material", or the like. Further, the position at which the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, or the like. ..

This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, and stored at the game hall side. It is used by mounting it on the unit 200. The self-supporting member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that largely protrude forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although it easily falls down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, the space between the dish unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island facility is set. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping. The pachinko machine 1 is easy to install and does not need to be installed.

Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over, so that it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to tipping over, and thus the game hall or the manufacturer. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

Further, since the mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 is assisted. Since it is possible to prevent it from falling forward, it is possible to make the effect device, the decoration member, and the like provided in the door frame 3 larger or to project further forward, and thus the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine whose appearance is significantly different from that of the machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are largely projected forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has high appeal.

In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. The frame unit 3 may be attached to and detached from the plate unit 200 by sliding in the left-right direction.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably attached to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member detachably provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202). , The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is attached. Allow 1 to stand in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is removed. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 that bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as the functional member that also serves as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can be made to function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the dish unit 200, and can be made to function as a functional member by being removed from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a. be able to. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is time-consuming to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) and then provided on the main body frame 4 in a detachable manner (for example, "a substrate cover covering a substrate", "wiring "Wiring holding member", "protection cover that protects the rear of the effect display device and movable decorative body," "storage tank for storing the game medium", "guidance member for circulating the game medium", etc.) You may make it double. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. To be able to become independent in the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 to form a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is time-consuming to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in a state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Since this is not possible, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player any discomfort can be provided.

Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as the functional member. It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for the above, and to suppress an increase in cost.

Furthermore, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Accordingly, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility to make it stand by itself, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the existence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming worse and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand by itself. Thus, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, compared to the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detached and separately stored, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the mounted portion is not included. Is also good.

Further, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that is attachable to and detachable from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be projected downward so as to be in contact with the setting plate 8 when being installed in the island facility. Accordingly, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time and labor required for management on the game hall side.

[10. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 208(a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 208(a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first performs various types of processing as step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes the data stored in the RAM built in the registers and the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power was turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol Whether or not to reach as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for the variable display control, the variable display of the special symbol Reach random numbers used for lottery processing (whether or not to perform effects), design random numbers used for lottery processing to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (1st symbol random number, 2nd symbol random number), a random number provided for the lottery process (ordinary random number) involved in the winning of the opening trigger of the second starting opening 2004 (ordinary random number), etc. I have it.

In addition, in this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2002 is started, the second winning opening 2004 is won. Even in the case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach effect execution rate can be determined by acquiring the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the reach random number acquired, and the second special symbol, different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (fluctuating random number) among these random numbers that is not related to winning or losing is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

FIG. 208(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 208(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005, Detection signals from various sensors such as a second count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001 and various magnetic sensors are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control internal RAM, is shown. Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning or losing the second opening opening 2004 as a process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then changes to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like in the normal symbol process process is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S19, the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, the above. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3051 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing for outputting the payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B is won in the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 3052 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball B is won in the second starting port 2004 and the first ball is won. (2) When the starting opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state, "1 ball", when the game ball B is won in the first big winning opening 2005 and the first count sensor is in the "15 ball", the second big winning opening When the game ball B is won in 2006 and the second count sensor is turned on, “15 balls”, when the game ball B is won in the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning opening sensor 3051 is turned on, The "8 balls" prize balls are to be paid out to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process of checking the increase/decrease in the number of pending storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the content of the register is restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3052. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is included in the main control. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit executing flag is set, the big hit game is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40) is performed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process (hit determination result and jackpot type content) for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests "15R jackpot". When it becomes, after the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B are won at the first big winning opening 2005 is detected by the first count sensor. The opening/closing pattern to be closed when repeated is repeated 15 times, and a process for controlling the 15R jackpot game is executed.

In the big hit control process, after the opening control of the first special winning opening 2005 as described above, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag that indicates that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot game based on the jackpot that is time saving controlled after the jackpot game is finished, and will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in 220 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the number of time saving is set so that the time saving control is ended when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, start the time saving control after the big hit game, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, the condition is satisfied. The time saving control is ended.

If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit. If the in-execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "small hit", the second special winning opening 2006 will be described later. It is closed after opening the second big winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the second big winning opening 2006. Perform the process to In addition, when the game ball B which is won in the second big winning opening 2006 and is distributed by the distribution member enters a specific area, the big winning game is controlled to open the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times. To do. On the other hand, if the game ball B that has won the first big winning opening 2005 and is sorted by the sorting member does not enter the specific area, and enters the discharge area, it is not controlled by the big hit game and is small. After the winning game is finished, the gaming state before the small hitting game (normal state or time saving state) is controlled again.

Further, the main control MPU, if neither the big hit running flag or the small hit running flag is set, the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the two special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the same is shown in FIG. 210. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, if it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S43-, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the first special symbol. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S41. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variation display according to the start winning (step S45), the process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the two LEDs of the first special reserve number indicator in the function display unit 1400 are first reserved. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, a command for instructing the first number of reserved storages (first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Type of game effect), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored in association with the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the first special random number is acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto is set (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the reach effect is executed as the game effect, or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. Will be able to grasp.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the first reserved storage area has a storage area of 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the preliminary judgment command is received when the preliminary judgment information is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary judgment information notified to the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, in advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift stored pre-determination information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), this can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. ..

FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the on state and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 212. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved memory number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” or not (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S53-in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol in the suspended state. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special pending number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004, the second holding state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second held. In addition to updating so as to correspond to the number of storages, a command for designating the second number of reserved storages (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, on condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), depending on the first special symbol process flag, one of the following five process processing, It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. The first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the first special symbol is selected based on the read first special random symbol for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process for the aspect is performed
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83)
5. The variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. To stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol stop process (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 208).

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are sequentially stored from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 216(A) (first special random number read in step S102 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, When the two special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process) (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 216(A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of different first special random numbers are the same as the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and different from the big hit determination value. Each of the first special random numbers matches the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has been won for the small hit, and the first special random number of 265 types matches the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. Associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of second special random numbers are 113 kinds of second special random numbers that are different from the big hit judgment value, which coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit has been won. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value that indicates the loss (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 113/270). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit compared to the determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. This is more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit judging process is ended.

The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the gaming state is at the time saving state, and a non-time saving used when the gaming state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination values are matched so that one type of reach random number reaches the reach determination value, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table selected and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), when it is determined that reach loss occurs (step S120), the fluctuation is A reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 217, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 216(B), and the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected big hit symbol determination table, the big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 216(B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with each symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (14R hour/hour jackpot, 5R hour/hour jackpot). Remembered The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the first winning opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B can be entered into the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 14R big hit game, and after the big hit game, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is 100. Until the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed twice, the state is ended and the time saving state is controlled to 14A.
2. After opening the first prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first prize hole 2005, it is closed. (1 round), after that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that 10 game balls B have been won at the second big winning opening 2006 by the second count sensor. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to close when detected, the game ball B is controlled to a 5R jackpot game in which the game ball B can enter (easy) the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. , After the big hit game, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or the next big hit game does not occur until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once 5R time saving big hit A to control to time saving state B which is ended
3. After opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the second big winning opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B can be entered into the second big winning hole 2006 (easy) and controlled to a 14R big hit game, and after the big hit game, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is 100. Until the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed once, the state is ended.
4. After opening the first prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first prize hole 2005, it is closed. (1 round), after that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that 10 game balls B have been won at the second big winning opening 2006 by the second count sensor. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to close when detected, the game ball B is controlled to a 5R jackpot game in which the game ball B can enter (easy) the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. , After the big hit game, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or the next big hit game does not occur until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once 5R time saving big hit B to control to the time saving state B which is ended

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are distributed when the 14R hour short-term big hit A is obtained, and 94 determination values are distributed when the 5R hour short-time big hit A is obtained. There is. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 6% probability of being 14R hour/short jackpot A, and a probability of 94% being 5R hour/short jackpot A. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R hour-shortening big hit B is obtained, and 42 determination values are distributed when the 5R hour-shortening big hit B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 58% probability of being a 14R hour-short jackpot B and a 42% probability of being a 5R hour-short jackpot B. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number is higher than the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002, The player is in an advantageous state.

Also, when the result of the lottery is obtained, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined according to the kind of big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit game is controlled, a process of setting a time saving flag based on the determination result and a process of setting the time saving number according to the type of the big hit in the time saving number counter. To be executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the big hits of "14R hour/hour jackpot A" and "14R hour/hour jackpot B" are obtained, after the jackpot game for 14 rounds is executed, a special symbol (first special symbol) And (2nd special symbol) symbol fluctuation is controlled to a time saving state until it is executed 100 times, and when it is determined that a big hit of "5R hour/hour big hit A" and "5R hour/hour big hit B" is obtained. After the big hit game for 5 rounds is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to the time saving state until it is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, it is always controlled to a short time state after the jackpot game is over, and similarly a lottery result that is a big hit by a lottery based on the second special random number. Even when the game is obtained, it is controlled to be in a time saving state after the end of the big hit game. However, when the big hits of "14R hour short and big hit A" and "14R hour short and big hit B" are obtained, the big hit game of the "5R time short big hit A" and "5R time short big hit B" are obtained After execution, it is controlled to be in a time saving state for a long period of time.

In addition, when it is determined to be 14R hour short and big hit A, it is decided as the 14R hour short and big hit A symbol as the 14R big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and when it is decided as 5R time and short jackpot A, the 5R big hit symbol of the first special symbol is 5R. Decide on a short-time jackpot A pattern. In addition, when it is determined to be the 14R time-short and big hit B in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 14R time-short and big-hit B symbol is decided as the 14R big-hit symbol of the second special symbol, and when the 5R time-short and big-hit B is decided. (2) As a special 5R jackpot design, it is decided to be a 5R short-time big hit B symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach lose, lose) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbol changes and stops, when the jackpot is specified from the received judgment result notification command, the jackpot symbol (the left/middle/right ornamental symbol is [0] to [8] same pattern combination), and if the reach loss is specified, the loss pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are the same [0] to [8] symbols) The combination of patterns with different middle decoration designs; reach loss design) is decided, and if the loss is specified, the loss design without reach (at least left/right of the left/middle/right decoration designs) The decorative pattern is determined to be a combination of different symbols), and the determined stop symbol is display-controlled when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 218, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal loss (reach effect). In the case of "missing not performing", a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of losing is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the variation pattern table is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Thereby, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the fluctuation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. The production control will be performed.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the pattern random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variable random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is executed, and 18 types of variable random numbers are determination values (223 to 240) indicating that any of the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation degree is executed. ) Is set as. It should be noted that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of a big-hit game, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game is increased when the super-reach effect is executed. It has become.

In the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds are set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, and 4 to 60 seconds are set in the time saving state. As the corresponding fluctuation time, 13 to 60 seconds is set in the non-time saving state, and 2 to 60 seconds is set in the time saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the hour/hour count counter in which the number of continuation of the hour/hour state is set is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is ended is set (step S154).

If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the count value of the hour/hour counter is “0”, and if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the hour/hour counter is not “0”, then Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is ended.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 219, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S171. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process is finished at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 220, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S181. As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of one special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, one time, or five times). The control of the non-time saving state is started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game and the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. And control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter reaches "0", the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the special winning opening opening processing (step S92) are repeatedly executed to make a big winning. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process shifts to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S93) to end the jackpot game. Control to be executed.

Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R hour/hour short/big hit A start command, 5R hour/hour short/big hit A start command) is set in accordance with the type of jackpot (14R hour/hour short/big hit A start command). As a result, the effect display of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process processing, a big hit start command (14R time short big hit B start command, 5R time short big hit B start according to the type of big hit (14R time short big hit B) Command).

In addition, the big hit execution flag which indicates that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, the big winning opening after-opening process (step S93) of the big hit control process (step S40) Opening/closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or ten game balls B are won in the first winning opening 2005. That is, when the opening/closing pattern for closing the opening/closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the first count sensor is ended (opening/closing control repeated 14 times or 5 times) (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game) is reset. While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is used. The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become executable.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S186), and the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S191), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit) corresponding to the type of small hit (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A) A start command). Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (5R small hit B1) according to the kind of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B) A start command, a 5R small hit B2 start command, and a 14R small hit B start command) are set.

In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting processing (step S401) of the small hitting control processing (step S41) described later. ) Open/close control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the first large winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds) or after the game ball B is 10 in the first winning opening 2005). It is reset when the open/close control for closing when the first count sensor detects that the individual prize has been won. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol in the vessel and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if it is a loss, set the interval timer to the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

When the process of steps S186 to S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S195), this process ends.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 is informed to the player such as the fact that the special hits (first special hits, second special hits) when the variable display is stopped becomes the big hit hits based on the fact that the mode becomes the big hit hits. Pre-opening process for the special winning opening, which waits until the next round is started or until the next round is started (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a big hit symbol, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to be open, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or Processing for opening the special winning opening which is closed when it is detected by the first count sensor or the second count sensor that ten game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (step S92)
3. After the completion of all rounds, the large winning opening opening post-processing that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 informs the player that the jackpot game is over (step S93)

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 208). In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S92), at the start of a round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round of setting and controlling the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to the closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a big hit game effect is displayed according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker and the like.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hitting process, one of the following two process processes will be selectively executed according to the small hitting process flag.

1. Small hitting start processing which executes the setting processing in order to start the small hitting game (step S400)
2. Processing during small hit (step S401) which monitors the entering and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 208). In addition, when the entry of the game ball B to the specific area is detected in the small hitting process, the big hitting execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hitting game according to the type of the small hitting (5R small 4 rounds if there is a hit, 13 rounds if there is a 14R small hit) are set in the big hit number counter, and the processing ends. As a result, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate portion passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read out normal random number, a lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol is performed. A normal symbol normal process (step S803)
2. Normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the random symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. Ordinary symbol fluctuation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for display mode when the variable control is stopped The mode when the variable control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Normal symbol stop processing for stopping variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", a process for controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is possible. Normal electric accessory release processing to be executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 208).

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 224, As the processing of step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains from the RAM of the main control MPU the counter value by the normal reservation number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area. .. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of the reserved storage of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol in the suspended state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of the reserved storage of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not performing the processing of step S812 to step S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure fluctuation random number are not acquired from the above random number counter), the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

Note that the gate passage process (step S802) may be another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines The ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned ordinary reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the reserved memory number of ordinary symbols is "4" which is its maximum value. To do. Then, when it is determined that the number of stored storage of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbol into the newly suspended state, the ordinary reserved number counter is incremented (1 is added. ), and then the previously obtained ordinary random number, the universal figure fluctuation random number (the ordinary random number stored in the temporary storage area, the universal figure fluctuation random number) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the holding storage number of the above-mentioned normal symbol is In the case of the maximum value), the normal random number previously acquired, the general pattern fluctuation random number is discarded without storing in the normal symbol holding storage area, and the variable display control of the acquired normal symbol is newly added. It may be possible not to be held.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 225, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S822, normally stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, general figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. The random numbers (ordinary random numbers and universal figure fluctuation random numbers) related to the display mode in (1) are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area. Store in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. Is stored, and various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. By this, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure permissible determination table shown in FIG. 226(A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The universal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 226(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the universal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, the ordinary random numbers are set so that all 10 types of ordinary random numbers match the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure is won. It is associated. That is, in the present example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the winning is always won per universal figure.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the per-universal figure hit is the result of comparison between the per-universal-drawing hit determination table and the normal random number read out in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829), The variation per winning symbol is selected for the universal symbol, and the universal symbol hit flag is set (step S830), and the regular symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined as the universal symbol per symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the general symbol lost symbol is determined as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

After the lottery process for the ordinary symbols is performed in this way, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (instruction of either normal figure or loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the universal figure determination result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process ends.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 227, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the time saving flag is set. If (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving is selected. (Step S843).

Then, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol to be executed (general symbol variation pattern) is determined by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process (step S844). ), a normal display fluctuation display of the normal pattern displayed in the normal pattern display unit of the function display unit 1400 by setting the normal pattern change pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal pattern change in the determined general pattern change pattern Is started (step S845).

Further, when the main control MPU determines the general pattern fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets the general pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern in the general pattern fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, production control is performed on the normal symbol display device (variable display of the normal symbol) of the function display unit 1400 for the normal symbol variation time according to the determined universal symbol variation pattern.

Further, in the non-time saving ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table of this example, 20 seconds is set as the universal symbol variation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving of this example, 0.8 seconds as the universal symbol variation time so that the universal symbol variation time is shorter than the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time reduction Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, when the variable display control of the normal symbol is started, next, as a process of step S847, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation process (step S805), this The process ends.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 228, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S851, In step S846, the universal figure variation timer for which the universal figure variation time is set is decremented by 1. Then, the universal figure variation time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806), this process ends.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S861, While performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. Then, the normal figure stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

Then, next, when the universal figure hitting flag is set (step S863), the universal figure hitting open pattern table shown in FIG. 226(B) is used, and the second starting opening according to the current game state. The opening pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as a drawing hit. The starting opening solenoid 2514 is turned on to execute the opening pattern A in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). Thereby, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004, the time during which the second starting opening 2004 is opened is short, and the game ball when the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state. Is difficult to enter. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed, the game ball hardly enters.

On the other hand, if the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be in the time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as a drawing hit. The opening port solenoid 2514 is turned on to execute the opening pattern B in which the second opening port 2004 is opened and closed in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long, and the game ball when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. You can enter.

When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, then, as the process of step S885, a universal figure start command indicating that the universal figure per game is started is set, and an ordinary symbol process flag is set to an ordinary electric accessory. When the process is updated so that the process shifts to the release process (step S866), this process ends. Note that the universal figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the universal figure game according to the type of universal figure instructed by the universal figure start command is the effect display device 1600. It can be performed by a lamp, an LED, a speaker, or the like.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S807).

Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 230, as shown in FIG. 230, the main control board 1310 main If a predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the control MPU controlled the second starting port 2004 to be in the open state (step S872), the second When the starting opening solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the starting opening 2004 is turned off and the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 causes the second starting port 2004 to close, as shown in FIG. If it is the timing to open the valve (step S874), the starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second opening 2004 is turned on to control the opening of the second opening 2004 (step S875). The process ends.

Further, in the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 230, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 causes the second starting port 2004 to open. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (the number of times of opening the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the universal figure end command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the universal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral figure control board 1510 receives the universal figure end command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like perform the effect of the universal figure hit game being executed. Can be terminated.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, a process executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 231, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU executes an 2mS steady process by generating an interrupt every 2mS. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. While setting the flag T, the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 mS steady-state process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Based on the result, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to various decorative substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process is completed, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 and indicating the progress status of the game. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command (first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern) that indicates a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the command analysis process. After performing the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. based on the second change pattern command for instructing the change pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value according to the change effect process. Change production start processing to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol ( One special symbol, the second special symbol) fluctuation production during the production process flag is changed to a value according to the variation end processing in response to the passage of the variation time according to the variation pattern (step S712)
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command instructing the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is lost, the above effect Variable production end processing that changes the process flag to a value according to the variation production start processing, if it is a big hit, to a value according to the big hit production processing, and if it is a small hit, to a value according to the small hit production processing (Step S713)
4. Based on receiving the big hit start command for instructing the start of the big hit game, processing for executing display control during the big hit game is performed on the effect display device 1600, and when the big hit game is finished, the effect process flag is changed. Big hit production process to change to a value according to the production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game, processing for executing display control during the small hit game is performed on the effect display device 1600, and the second big winning opening during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to a specific area, when the small hit game is finished, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect start processing, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area. If not, a small hit effect process for changing the value according to the variable effect start process (step S715)

Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400) by the above processing The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of No.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the time saving state, the opening/closing control of the second starting port 2004 is performed in an opening pattern different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, if the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped and it is in a time saving state, the opening pattern A of the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is used as the second starting opening 2004. If the non-time saving state when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped by opening and closing the second open pattern B in the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

In this way, since the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is changed with reference to the time when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the time saving state ends (for example, the time saving number of times). If the time saving state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in the special symbol in the time saving state (first special symbol, second special symbol immediately before the variable display of the 100th time stops, etc.) In the case of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 after stopping the normal symbol variation executed in step 2, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the open pattern B in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example). Will be done. Further, when the time saving state ends after the second starting opening 2004 is opened, the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed even though the time saving state has ended. Further, there may be a case where a start winning a prize for the second starting opening 2004 occurs at an unexpected time such as after the symbol variation starts in the non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the variable display of the second special symbol is hardly executed, but to the second starting opening 2004 despite the non-time saving state The start winning award occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and while the game progresses, the behavior gives the player a feeling of strangeness, which may lead to a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when stopping the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 with a lost symbol (for example, the first One special symbol stop process step S194), usually, the interval timer "0.5 seconds" as the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process process (step S28) and the second special symbol process process (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (second One special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) is controlled so that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not started.

In addition, when ending the time saving state, that is, when the symbol variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the number of time reductions, when the symbol variation stops (time saving When the last symbol variation in the state has stopped), the interval timer "2 seconds" is set as the waiting time (time to display the special symbol stop symbol) until the next variable symbol variation display starts. set. As described above, in the time saving state, after changing the second starting port 2004 to the open state, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have passed. Therefore, by setting the interval timer to "2 seconds" when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is stopped and the time saving state is ended, before the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started. It is possible to change the two starting ports 2004 to a closed state, whereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a starting prize to the second starting port 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started.

The period set in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 in the time saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds") or more. Also, when the last symbol variation in the time saving state is stopped and the time saving state is ended and the second special winning opening 2006 is not changed to the open state, as the waiting time until the next variation display of the special symbol is started. You may make it set the same time as usual ("0.5 second" in this example).

In this way, when the final special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops), regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number, within a predetermined period By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (judgment determination), time saving control that can be continued after the final special lottery result in the time saving state has been derived (after the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state has stopped) Can be ended within the predetermined period, and the second hold number can be prevented from increasing after the end of the time saving control. As a result, the game proceeds in a behavior not intended by the game designer that a start winning is generated in the second start opening 2004 and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed despite the non-time saving state. This can be prevented, and the progress of the game in the behavior intended by the game designer (the game property intended by the game designer) can be appropriately realized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevent the game from being deteriorated. ..

In the above example, when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is determined whether the time saving state is determined (determination as to whether the time saving state is ended) is stopped. Although shown as what to do as a reference, when starting the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether it is a time saving state (for example, the normal symbol normal process (step S803) above) May be performed or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is performed) may be performed as a reference. In this case, at least, the variation time of the normal symbol variation (general symbol variation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state The opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) may be equal to or longer than the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example).

[12. Production in an advantageous state]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of specifications of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter will be described. FIG. 234(A) is an example of a hit probability table, and FIG. 234(B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. The hit probability table and the big hit distribution table are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, for example.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as simply a special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as a special symbol variation or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 include a big hit and a small hit.

The hit probability table is a big hit probability during a low-probability state (that is, a non-probability variation state) and a high-probability state (that is, a probabilistic state), a small-hit probability (there is no distinction between a low-probability state and a high-probability state) Is defined. The jackpot probability is common to special figures 1 and 2. In addition, the hit probability table defines the small hit probability in the special figure 2. That is, according to the winning probability table of FIG. 234, the small hit is won with a high probability when the special figure 2 is won. In addition, from the winning of the special figure 1, the small hit is not won, or the odds are very low compared to the special figure 2 (for example, 1/300 or less).

In this chapter, when a small win is won, the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

The jackpot distribution table defines the distribution of jackpot types when the jackpot is won for each of the special maps 1 and 2. “2R”, “8R”, and “16R” in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and “low probability short time existence”, “high accuracy short time absence”, and “high accuracy short time existence” are the big hits. The game state which shifts after completion is shown.

In addition, "special figure 1_8R low-probability short-time symbol design 1", "special figure 1_8R low-probability short-term symbol pattern 2", "special figure 1_8R low-probability short-term symbol pattern 3", "special figure 2_2R low-probability short-term symbol pattern 1", "Special figure 2_2R low-probability short-term design 2", "Special figure 2_2R low-probability short-term design 3", and "special figure 2_2R high-probability short-term design 3" is 10 times, and "special figure 2_2R high" The number of time saving of "probability time shortened design 1" is 7 times, and the number of time saving of "special figure 2_2R low certainty time short design 2" is 9 times.

The number of time saving is the number of times of change that triggers the end of the time saving state which is started after the end of the big hit game. In other words, after entering the time saving state, the time saving state ends when the fluctuation of the number of times determined by the time saving ends. Note that the number of shortening times may be determined by the total number of changes in the special maps 1 and 2, or may be determined by the number of changes in one of the special maps. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of shortening times is determined by the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2. That is, for example, in the time-saving state that shifts after the big hit of “special figure 2 — 2R high-accuracy time-short pattern 1”, even if the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 reaches 7, the change of special figure 2 If is not completed 7 times, it shall not be completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are individually set to start the variable display according to the extraction of the special random numbers, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changed. Display and display can be executed simultaneously (simultaneous change of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the reserved special random numbers are individually digested according to the degree of progress of the variable display of the individual special random numbers.

That is, when the changing first special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the first special symbol held in the first special symbol storage display is started, and the second special symbol being changed is stopped, the second special symbol. The fluctuation of the second special symbol held in the memory display is started. Further, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are displayed so as to change simultaneously in response to the change of each special symbol.

When either one of the special maps 1 and 2 is stopped in the display mode showing a big hit, any one of the following processes is performed as the process for the other special map which is changing simultaneously. .. As a first processing example, while controlling the big hit game according to one special figure, the fluctuation of the other special figure is deleted (forcibly stopped at a deviation). In this case, even after the jackpot game is over, the variation of the other special figure deleted is not restarted, and the variation of the next special figure on the other side is started.

As a second processing example, while controlling the big hit game according to one special figure, while the big hit game is being executed, the passage of the variation time of the other special figure is temporarily stopped. During the execution of the big hit game, the special figure during the fluctuation stop is, for example, a blinking display on the special symbol display (different from when not paused (displayed in a mode that the player can recognize that it is paused)) To be done. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the variable display of the other special figure that has been temporarily stopped is restarted from the remaining variable time. As a third processing example, while controlling the big hit game by one special figure, reset the fluctuation time of the other special figure, and after the end of the big hit game, start the fluctuation of the other special figure again.

In this chapter, the high-precision non-time saving state is a state in which it is easy to obtain a small winning ball (so-called small hit rush). Hereinafter, an example of specifications for realizing the small hit rush only in the highly accurate non-time saving state will be described.

First, the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary lottery probability will be described. The variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, about 1 second in both the time saving state and the non-time saving state, which is a short time compared with the variation time of the special symbol variation. In addition, in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the probability of a normal win is extremely high in the normal lottery result performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 (for example, 1/1). In addition, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when the normal symbol is won is long in the time saving state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-time saving state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

Subsequently, a game method in each state will be described. As described above, the probability of winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely high as compared with the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 234(A)). Therefore, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball B is inserted into the second starting port 2004, with a high probability of a small hit. Can be elected.

However, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is much longer than the fluctuation time of special figure 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 10 minutes) of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (for example, about 5 minutes). Therefore, the time interval between winning the small hit and opening the first big winning opening 2005 is very long, and the opening and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is short and the number of times of opening and closing is small, Even if the variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the first special winning opening 2005 in a timely manner during the small hit game.

In addition, specifically, in the small hit game, the total opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 is shorter than the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. For example, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for about 0.5 seconds and then closed for about 1.35 seconds. A small hit game in which the first pattern is executed only once, or the first big winning opening 2005 is set to 0.5. There is a small hit game in which the second pattern, which is opened for about 2 seconds and then closed for about 0.7 seconds, is repeated twice and then the first pattern is executed once.

Even if the game ball B can be thrown into the first big winning opening 2005 at a timely timing during the small hit game, the variation time of the special map 2 is very long, and therefore the payout obtained per unit time In addition to that, the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the player basically makes a left hit and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002.

On the other hand, in the short-time state (low-probability short-time state and high-probability short-time state), the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the out-of-shortening variation (variation in which the reach effect is not executed) of Toku-zu 2 is set shorter than the shortest variation time of Toku-zu 1 (for example, about 4 seconds). Therefore, when the shift variation starts in the state where the special figure 2 is held in the time saving state, the shortening is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%) of the shift variation. Therefore, in the time saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed striking and advances the game so that the game ball B is inserted into the second starting opening 2004, so that the number of balls output is reduced and smoothly. The game can be advanced.

Here, since the second starting port 2004 is located downstream of the gate portion 2003 in the flow path of the gaming ball B on the game board 5, most of the gaming ball B heading to the second starting port 2004 is the second starting port 2004. Before passing through the gate portion 2003. In addition, the first big winning opening 2005 which is opened during the small hitting game is downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5. When the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B heading to the first big winning opening 2005 enters the second starting opening 2004 and does not reach the first big winning opening 2005. That is, in order to enter the game ball B into the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball B needs to pass over the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening 2004 is in the closed state.

However, in the time saving state, since the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 when winning a normal win is long (for example, about 6 seconds), the game heading toward the first big winning opening 2005 of the right-handed game ball B. Most of the balls B enter the open second start opening 2004 and do not reach the first special winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the time saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 and frequently win the small hit, but cannot obtain the payout by the small hit game. .. In addition, since the number of prize balls when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 is, for example, one, the special figure 2 variation can be executed in the time saving state without substantially reducing the number of balls output. It is difficult to increase the number of balls.

Further, the first special winning opening 2005 is arranged at a position where there is almost no gaming ball B reaching the first big winning opening 2005 when so-called left-handing is performed, so that it is left-handed during the time saving state. We also take care of so-called attacking actions that try to increase the number of game balls B by alternating right-handedness.

Subsequently, in the highly accurate non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to be short (for example, about 1 second) as in the time saving state. Therefore, in the highly accurate non-time saving state, the player executes a so-called right hit and advances the game so as to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. Furthermore, in the high-probability non-time saving state, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 when a normal win is won is a time sufficient for allowing the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004 and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), so a considerable number (for example, more than half) of the right-handed game balls B pass over the second start port 2004 in the closed state and the first big winning port. Reach 2005.

That is, in the high-probability non-time saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 to frequently win the small hit, and can obtain the payout by the small hit game. With the above-described specifications, it is possible to realize a small hit rush that makes it easy to obtain a ball in a small hit only in a highly accurate non-time saving state.

FIG. 235 is a transition diagram showing an example of the game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. As described above, the variation of Toku-zu 1 is executed in the low-probability non-time saving state, and the variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed in the states other than the low-probability non-time saving state, whereby the player smoothly progresses the game. You can On the other hand, since the transition from the low-probability non-time saving state to the special figure 2 big hit and the transition from a state other than the low certainty non-time saving state to the special figure 1 big hit are irregular, they are described by dotted lines in FIG. 235. ing.

In any state, when the big hit is won, it shifts to either the low-probability time-shortening state, the high-probability time-shortening state, or the high-probability non-time-saving state according to the type of the big hit. In the low-probability time-shortening state, when the fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the number of time-savings determined by the big hit type that triggered the transition to the low-probability time-saving state ends, the low-probability non-time-saving state is entered. In addition, in the high-accuracy short-time state, when the variation in special figure 2 of the number of time-savings determined by the big hit type that triggered the transition to the high-accuracy time-shortening state ends, the high-precision non-time-saving state, that is, a small hit rush Transition.

The transition from the highly accurate time saving state to the highly accurate non-time saving state seems to be a disadvantageous state transition to the player at first glance, but as described above, the small hit lash is realized in the highly accurate untime saving state, which is advantageous for the player. It is a state transition. Therefore, when the highly accurate time saving state ends due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 determined by the number of times saving, the player can obtain a feeling of excitement without lowering the interest.

[12-2. Rush rush opportunity production]
Hereinafter, a rush rush effect, which is an effect executed from the start of the time saving state (high-accuracy time saving state and low accuracy time saving state), will be described. The rush rush chance presentation is that at the start of the time saving state, it informs that the current state is a time saving state but it is unknown whether it is a high accuracy time saving state or a low accuracy time saving state. It is an effect that informs whether the state is a high-accuracy short-time state (that is, a state of shifting to the high-precision non-time-short state which is a small hit rush state after the end of the specified number of special 2 fluctuations) or a low-precision short-time state. ..

236, 237, and 238 are explanatory views showing an example of the rush entry chance effect. In FIGS. 236, 237, and 238, an example will be described in which the number of time saving times is 10 and all the changes in the time saving state are outlier changes.

(A) is a state in which the time saving and big hit have ended. On the effect display device 1600, the same decorative pattern indicating a big hit is stopped. In addition, the expected value of the winning coins at the time of winning the big hit increases in the order of low-probability short-time big hit, high-probability short-time big hit, high-precision short-time big hit. For example, when "7" assortment of decorative symbols is selected, it is preferable to select a combination of decorative symbols so that the winning of the highly accurate time-short, no-big hit is confirmed. In addition, when the odd number of decorative patterns is selected, the odds of winning the high-precision time/short/large hit are higher than those of the low-precision time/short/big hit. The combination of decorative patterns may be selected.

It should be noted that an effect of promoting the decorative design may be executed during the big hit. Specifically, for example, although the odds or evens are stopped when the symbols are confirmed, the odds or evens are stopped when the symbol is confirmed, and the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, and the decorative symbols are promoted to "7". Good.

(B) is a state in which the time saving/hits have ended and the time saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), since the time saving state has started, a display (a right-handed display) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, which prompts the player to perform so-called right-handed hitting and enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. There is. At the start of the time saving state, a large right-handed display (three arrows described as "right-handed!!") in the middle and lower parts of the effect display device 1600 and a small right-handed display (upper right part of the effect display device 1600 (" Right arrow!” is displayed.

(D) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C), and the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 has started. The large right-handed display is deleted from the effect display device 1600. Further, a display showing the maximum value of the remaining shortened times is displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the number of times saved is 7 times, 8 times, or 10 times. Therefore, in the state of (D) where the fluctuation of special figure 2 has not ended even one fluctuation, the maximum value is “10 times remaining”. Is displayed. In addition, the display "Power up the character in 6 seconds!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It should be noted that the power-up effect of the character is performed by using the six variations from the first variation to the sixth variation in the special figure 2 in the time saving state. In the power-up effect, an image of a character wearing an aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the aura color is stepped up in the six times of variation.

For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for power-up effects. The scenario management table stores a scenario and distribution of power-up effects for each of the low-probability short-time state and the high-probability short-time state. The scenario shows the color of the aura in each of the six fluctuations. In each scenario, the expectation that the aura color in the final fluctuation of the power-up effect is the highly accurate time saving state in the order of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent increases. It should be noted that the iridescent color is selected only when the current state is the highly accurate time saving state.

Further, it is desirable that the aura color does not step down (for example, white in the next variation of blue) in the six variations of each scenario. This is because the player's expectation may be reduced. Further, for example, when the final aura colors in the power-up effect are the same, the higher the degree of expectation of the highly accurate time-shortening state may be, the higher the number of fluctuations reaching the final aura color is. Specifically, for example, in the case where the final aura color is red, when the red color is reached by the sixth change in special figure 2 and when the red color is reached by the fourth change in special figure 2, The latter is more likely to be a highly accurate time saving state. The former may have a higher degree of expectation of being in the highly accurate time saving state. This is because the expectation can be extended to the last (sixth) change.

Further, in each scenario, the aura color may be promoted by one stage, may be promoted by a plurality of stages, or may not be promoted by one variation. When the aura color is promoted in multiple steps in one change, in the change, for example, you may step up from white to green without going through blue, or in the change, step up to white, blue, and green in order. You may. In each scenario, the aura color displayed first in the first change in Toku-zu 2 may not be the one with the lowest expectation (that is, it may not be white).

In addition, "6 seconds" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in which the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. That is, for example, as will be described later, “6 seconds left” in the first variation of the time saving state (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 6 variations) and “after the second variation”. 5 seconds" (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 5 variations) is displayed. That is, since the remaining time indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until the rock destruction effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of time saving may be omitted.

(E) is the first variation in Toku-zu 2 after the time saving state has started, and is the state following (D). On the effect display device 1600, a character wearing an aura and a display of "6 seconds left" are displayed.

(F) is a state at the end of the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the time saving state is started. After the state of (E), the color of the aura has been promoted from white to blue until the end of the change, and a display (“power up!!”) indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted is displayed on the production display device 1600. Displayed in. (G) is a state in which the second variation of Toku-zu 2 has started after the time saving state has started. The character's aura color is still blue, and the effect display device 1600 displays “5 more seconds”. The same effect is repeated until the fifth change in special map 2.

(H) is a changing state of special figure 2 for the sixth time since the time saving state started. In the sixth variation of Toku-zu 2, the color of the aura is promoted to red, and a display (“power up!!”) indicating that the aura color is promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 236, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

(I) is the state at the end of the sixth special view 2 from the start of the time saving state. In the sixth change, after the aura-colored step-up is completed, the introduction effect of the rock destruction effect that is performed in the seventh to tenth changes in Toku-zu 2 is executed. In (I), "Destroy the rock!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the introduction effect. Only when the current state is the highly accurate time saving state, the character destroys the rock in the rock destruction production.

(J) is a changing state of the special figure 2 for the 7th time since the time saving state started. An image in which the rock destruction effect has started and the character hits the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. During the rock destruction production, for example, the character wears a red aura, which is the final aura color of the power-up production.

As a result, even during the rock destruction production, the player does not forget the degree of expectation, which is the highly accurate time saving state. On the contrary, the character may not wear the aura during the rock destruction production. This is because some players do not want other players to know the degree of expectation. When the character wears an aura during the rock destruction effect, the aura color may be stepped up even during the rock destruction effect.

(K) is the state of the seventh variation in FIG. 2 from the start of the time saving state, and the state following (J). The effect display device 1600 displays an image of a state in which the rock is cracked but the rock is not broken due to the character hitting the rock. (L) is the state at the end of the seventh variation in FIG. 2 from the start of the time saving state. A display indicating that the rock destruction production is still continuing (“Still still!!”) is displayed on the production display device 1600. After that, the same effect is repeated.

(M) is a changing state of the special figure 2 for the eighth time since the time saving state started. In the rock destruction production, an image in which the character hits the rock again is displayed on the production display device 1600. (N) is the state at the end of the variation of FIG. 2 for the ninth time since the time saving state started. The effect display device 1600 displays a display (“Bet on this blow!”) indicating that the next change in Toku-zu 2 is the last change in the rock destruction effect.

(O) is the state during the change of FIG. 2 at the 10th time (that is, the end of the time saving state) from the start of the time saving state. An image of a character hitting a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The cracks on the rock may increase each time the character hits the rock. In (O), the number of cracks in rocks is higher than in (M).

(P) is a state in which the time-saving state is changing for the tenth time after the start of the special time period 2 and continues from (O). The effect display device 1600 displays an image that succeeds in destroying the rock (that is, an image showing that the current state is the high-precision short-time state and that the transition to the high non-short-time state is made at the end of the fluctuation). ing. It should be noted that after the image that failed to destroy the rock is displayed, a revival effect may be performed to display the image that succeeded in destroying the rock. (Q) is the state at the end of the 10th variation in Toku-zu 2 after the time saving state has started. The effect display device 1600 displays an image (“rush rush!!”) indicating that the high-precision non-time saving state is entered.

In the case of the high-precision time-shortening state in which the number of time saving is 7, the image in which the rock is destroyed at the 7th variation of Toku-zu 2 and the image transitioning to the high-precision non-time-saving state (that is, (P), (Q ). However, the remaining number of times in the upper left portion is displayed as “4 times remaining”) is displayed. Similarly, in the case of the highly accurate time saving state in which the number of hours is 9 times, the image in which the rock is destroyed and the image transitioning to the highly accurate non-time saving state at the ninth variation of the special figure 2 (that is, (P), ( The image of Q), provided that the remaining number of times in the upper left portion is displayed as "2 more times".

In the example described above, the time saving state in which the number of time saving is 7 times and 9 times is not selected in the low probability time saving state. If there is a low-probability time-shortening state in which the number of times saved is 7 and 9, the rock destruction that ends in failure with a small number of fluctuations will be performed, and thus the player cannot be uplifted. is there.

FIGS. 238(P') and (Q') are examples of the rock destruction effect when the current state is the non-time saving state. (P') is a state in which the time-saving state is changing for the tenth time after the start of the special figure 2 and is a state following (O). In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character fails to destroy the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Q') is a state in which the tenth variation of FIG. 2 has ended after the time saving state started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has ended is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After this, the state shifts to the low-probability untimely state.

Note that, for example, in the power-up effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image that prompts pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, It may be notified whether or not the aura step-up can be performed. Similarly, for example, in the rock destruction effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. , Rock breakage may be notified.

When the fluctuation during the time saving state, that is, during the rush entry effect is a big hit change, for example, the big hit is notified by an effect different from the effect of destroying the rock. This is so that the player can clearly distinguish whether the big hit has been won or whether the transition to the highly accurate time saving state has succeeded.

As a specific effect, for example, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600 immediately after the start of the change. The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) according to the variation pattern. After that, when the shutter group is opened, an icon indicating the type of jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the decorative design is stopped. On the other hand, the big hit may be notified by the effect of destroying the rock. As a result, the player cannot immediately recognize whether or not he or she has won the big jackpot or has transitioned to the highly accurate time saving state, and thus can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Small hit rush production]
239 and 240 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect during the small hit rush. (A) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation in the highly accurate short time state, that is, a state similar to FIG. 237(Q). (B) is a changing state of the highly accurate non-time saving state. In the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a display (“rushing!!”) indicating that the current state is the highly accurate non-time saving state (that is, the small hit rushing!) is displayed.

Further, in (B), there is a total acquisition sphere count display area and a timer display area in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600. In the total acquired ball number display area, the total number of acquired balls from the start of the small hit rush and the number of balls paid out by the big hit are displayed. In addition, for example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning opening or a starting opening other than the special winning opening is not included in the total number of acquired balls.

Note that, for example, the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into the general winning opening may be included in the total number of acquired balls, but in this case, a predetermined number is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time of the entering ball. It is desirable to output the image, output a predetermined sound from various speakers, or output a predetermined light from various lamps. This is for the player to recognize that the total number of balls to be acquired is increased by the game balls B entering the general winning opening.

In addition, the display of the total number of balls won is not always possible to shift to the high-probability non-time saving state. At the end of the change, the total number of balls won will stop counting. However, if you win the big hit that can not necessarily shift to the high-precision non-time saving state, but if you can shift to the high-precision non-time saving state again without falling to the low precision non-time saving state, you will get the total again. The number of balls is displayed again, and the counting is restarted from the value at the last count stop. In addition, although it was won for the big hit that can not necessarily shift to the high-accuracy non-time saving state, if the high-precision time-short and big hit was won during the time-shortening state that was changed by the big hit, At the start, the total number of acquired balls may be redisplayed and the counting may be restarted.

In the timer display area, the digestion time of the small hit rush counted from the start of the small hit rush is displayed. When the small hit rush starts, it may be at the end of the high-precision short time no big hit game, or at the end of the final fluctuation in the high-precision time-short state, or at the start of the first fluctuation in the high-precision time-short state. Good.

(C) is a state in which the high-accuracy non-time saving state has ended the high-accuracy time short non-big hit variation. Since the timer in the timer display area shows the short hit rush consumption time, the timer is stopped at the end of the big hit fluctuation during the highly accurate non-time saving (at the end of the big hit fluctuation). (D) is a big hit game of high-accuracy, short time, no big hit. Even during the big hit game, the total number of acquired balls is displayed and added. Although the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big hit, it may be displayed while the timer is stopped.

(E) is a big hit game of high accuracy short time no big hit, and is a state following (D). When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the arrival display is performed on the effect display device 1600. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the arrival display is performed every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 1,000. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the display "1000 PT exceeded!!" indicating that the number of shots has reached 1000 in (E) is displayed. In addition to the arrival display, various lights may be output from various lamps, certain sounds may be output from various speakers, and BGM may be changed. Note that, for example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30,000 shots), the reaching display may not be performed.

Note that, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,..., 1000 shots, 5000 shots, 10000 shots, The difference from the previous stage may be set so that the later the stage, such as 20,000 shots,...

(F) is a state just before the end of the big hit game of high accuracy short time no big hit. (G) is a state immediately after the end of the big hit game of high accuracy short time no big hit. The effect display device 1600 displays a highly accurate non-time saving state, that is, a display indicating that the small hit rush starts again. Further, in (G), there is an acquired sphere count history display area in the upper middle part of the effect display device 1600. In the acquired ball number history display area, the history of the total number of coins obtained by one big hit and the coins obtained in the small hit rush that wins the big hit is displayed. In (G), since 2910 balls have been won in the big hit and the last small hit rush, “2910” is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area.

(H) is a state in which the total number of balls acquired has reached 5000 during the small hit rush. When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the background image on the effect display device 1600 changes. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the background image changes every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 5000. In addition, with the change of the background image, a predetermined light may be output from various lamps, a predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or the BGM after the background image is changed may be changed. Note that, for example, the background image may not be changed after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30,000 shots).

In the example of FIG. 239, the arrival display of the total number of acquired balls is displayed every 1000 shots, and the background image is changed every 5000 shots. Therefore, the total number of acquired balls is 5000 shots, 10000 shots, 15000 shots, .., the arrival display and the change of the background image are both performed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

The arrival display and the change of the background image on the effect display device 1600 are sequentially executed in accordance with a predetermined priority order, for example. For example, since the background image change is executed less frequently than the arrival display, the background image change can give the player a more uplifting feeling than the arrival display. The timing of giving a stronger feeling of uplifting to the player differs depending on whether the background image is changed first or later.

The arrival display and the background image change may be performed at the same time. By performing the arrival display and the change of the background image at the same time, a synergistic effect can be obtained, and a stronger uplifting feeling can be given to the player as compared with the case where these effects are performed alone. The same applies to the output of light or sound that is executed at the same time as the arrival display or the change of the background image.

(I) is the state at the end of the fluctuation with the shortening of time. Since the rush rush chance production is performed after the completion of the big hit, it is desirable not to inform at this time whether the relevant short working time big hit is a high-probability time short win big hit or a low-probability time short win big hit.

(J) is a state at the end of the jackpot variation with time reduction and is a state following (I). It is displayed as a result on the effect display device 1600, and the total number of acquired balls at the end of the jackpot variation, and the cumulative time of the timer. The result is displayed at that timing because it is not always possible to shift to the high-precision non-time saving state (small hit rush) again without falling to the low-probability non-time saving state by winning the time saving big hit. Is.

(K) is a state in which the big hit with time saving is completed. (L) is the state where the rush entry chance has started. (M) is a state in which the final variation of the rush entry chance (final variation in the time saving state) is being changed, and is a state in which the effect of destroying the rock is being executed. (N) is the state at the end of the final fluctuation, and is the state in which the transition to the highly accurate non-time saving state has been notified. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are similar to FIGS. 236(A), 236(B), 237(P), and 237(Q), respectively, and thus detailed The description is omitted.

(O) is a changing state of the highly accurate non-time saving state. When it is possible to return to the high-probability non-time saving state again without falling to the low-probability non-time saving state, for example, the display of each display area is as follows. The timer display in the timer display area inherits the value at the end of the immediately previous high-precision non-time saving state. In addition, the total number of acquired balls in the total number of acquired balls display area is the sum of the value at the end of the immediately preceding high-precision non-time saving state and the number of payout balls obtained in the immediately previous time saving bonus. It Further, an image corresponding to the total number of acquired balls is displayed on the background image. Further, in the acquired ball number history display area, the history of the total number of the winning balls obtained by the immediately preceding short-time winning and jackpot and the winning balls awarded by the small hit rush that has been won. These histories are displayed, for example, for the 10 most recent big hits that have been won without falling into a low-probability non-time saving state.

As a result, if the player can return to the high-precision non-time saving state again without falling to the low-probability non-time saving state, it is possible to display that the previous state is taken over, and the player can cross the low accuracy non-time saving state. It is possible to accurately grasp the payouts that can be obtained without losing. In addition, if the total number of acquired balls or the timer is reset each time the high-precision non-time saving state ends, it is unlikely that a large value will be displayed on these displays, and the player will be uplifted. The display content is as described above, because the user cannot feel it.

In addition, as described above, the total value of the winning balls in one big hit game and the winning balls in the high-probability non-time saving state (small hit rush) immediately before the big hit game is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area. Therefore, since it is possible to show a numerical value larger than the expected value of the winning payout per one big hit game using the acquired ball count history display area, it is possible to give a feeling of uplifting. Further, for example, the display mode may be changed depending on the value displayed in the acquired sphere count history display area. Specifically, it is a blue number if it is less than 5000, a red number if it is 5,000 or more and less than 10,000, and a rainbow number if it exceeds 10,000. Further, although the last 10 times are displayed, the 11th and subsequent times may be displayed as a value obtained by summing the values of 1 to 10 times.

[12-4. Performance during a big hit]
The effects during the big hit will be described below. For example, a song that can be played during the high-accuracy short-time, non-maximum hit is added every time the high-precision short-time, non-maximum hit is won without falling into the low-probability short-time non-short win. For example, only the song A can be selected in the first highly-accurate time, short and big jackpot that is won without straddling the low-probability non-time-short state, and the song B can be further selected in the second highly-accurate, time-and-nothing jackpot. Yes, music C can be further selected in the third highly accurate time, short and big hit, and music D can be further selected in the fourth and subsequent highly accurate time, short and big hits.

It should be noted that in the second and subsequent high-precision short and short wins, the player can select a music piece to be played from the selectable music pieces by performing an operation using a predetermined operation unit. If the player does not select a song, for example, the song A is won in the first high-precision short, short and big hit without winning over the low-probability non-short-time jackpot, and the song A is in the second high-precision, short, short, big hit. It is assumed that B is a music piece C in the third highly accurate time, short and big hit, and music piece D is played in the fourth and subsequent high accuracy short, big hits.

Moreover, the music that was playing during the high-precision short, short and big hit may continue to be played even during the high-precision non-short-lived state, which shifts after the end of the high-precision, short, short and big hit. Further, even in the highly accurate non-time saving state, the music may be selectable by the player's operation of a predetermined operation unit.

FIG. 241 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect during the highly accurate short time no big hit. Specifically, an effect in which all the songs can be selected by inputting a predetermined command (hidden command) during the high-accuracy, short-time, no-hit, will be described.

(A) is a state in which the second highly-accurate, short-time, no-hit, which has been won without falling to the low-probability, short-time, has started. (B) is a state in which the first round of the high-precision, short-time, no-big hit is being executed. A music selection box and an image explaining a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, since it is the second high-precision, short-time, and no-hit jackpot that was won without falling into the low-probability non-time saving state, the music A and the music B can be selected. B is selected.

These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a first round start command from the main control MPU. Further, for example, at the same timing, the operation acceptance period of the operation unit for executing the music selection operation starts. The operation acceptance period ends, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round end command of the final round from the main control MPU.

In the example of FIG. 241, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the cursor for selecting the music A and the music B is moved, and by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, the currently playing music is changed to the cursor. Changes to the music pointed to.

The hidden command operation acceptance period starts, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU and ends when the second round end command is received. .. (C) is a state after the hidden command is input in (B). All songs (songs A to D) can be selected.

The hidden command is, for example, a command for long-pressing (for example, pressing for 3 seconds or more) the central pressing operation unit 303a. As described above, the hidden command operation acceptance period overlaps with the music selection operation acceptance period.

In the music selection, the peripheral control MPU changes the central pressing operation unit 303a from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, and the pressed state is not long-pressed (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for 3 seconds or more). In this case, the music determination is executed.

If the central pressing operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, when deciding the music, the player intends to execute the hidden command, but the music determination is executed, so There is a risk that the user may misunderstand that the operation was wrong and do not continue pressing until a long-pressed state, which is a hidden command. Further, if the music is decided when the pressed state changes to the non-pressed state when the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the long-pressed state, the music is always written when the hidden command is executed. Since the decision is executed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the determination of the music is executed when the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied.

Note that, for example, even in the operation for notifying the winning result of the reach effect and the determination operation on the character selection screen and the like to be described later, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state in this way. Alternatively, it may be determined that the central pressing operation unit 303a has been operated.

[13. Demonstration screen production]
[13-1. Normal demonstration screen production]
Hereinafter, an example of the demonstration screen when the fluctuation is not executed will be described. FIG. 242 is an example of the timetable of the demo screen. In the timetable, the display contents on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the display contents, whether the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, whether the volume light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, whether BGM is flowing, and a predetermined movable body (role) In this chapter, it is defined whether or not the back and rear movable decoration body 3110) is in a falling state.

In a state in which the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image showing the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 is displayed and the volume can be adjusted. In a state in which the volume light amount adjustment jog can be received, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image showing one of the volume and the light amount is displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image is displayed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of being displayed, an image showing the other of the volume and the light amount is displayed, and the other can be adjusted.

In addition, as described above, the back rear movable ornament 3110 is a vertically movable ornament. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located at the above-mentioned retracted position above the game board 5 or at the above-mentioned appearance position at the center of the game board 5 depending on the effect state.

Hereinafter, a specific flow of production on the demo screen will be described. First, fluctuation or big hit is executed (NO1). At the end of the change or the big hit, the decorative pattern is stopped on the effect display device 1600 (NO2). After that, when there is no suspension of fluctuation, the stopped state of the fixed decorative design is maintained (NO3). In any of NO1 to NO3, the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the variable BGM is flowing, and the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the dropped state, that is, in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section in which the volume adjustment jog reception is prohibited, such as during a predetermined reach effect or during a predetermined round of a big hit.

Then, a predetermined image is displayed (NO4-1). Subsequently, a telop image (also referred to as a volume light amount adjustment telop) indicating that it is possible to transition to the volume light amount adjustment screen while the predetermined image is displayed, and a character for determining a later-changing effect state. A telop image (also called a character selection telop) indicating that the transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

Note that, for example, the video played in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is a video for 30 seconds, and is loop-played between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In both NO4-1 and NO4-2, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, and the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in the retracted position. However, in NO4-1, the BGM is flowing, but the BGM fades out from the start of NO4-2 (the sound volume decreases and then stops).

Next, the model demo movie of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), then the manufacturer logo is displayed (NO6), then the jog button caution movie is displayed (NO7), and then the demo screen common to the manufacturers (goto). An action prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

Further, thereafter, the volume light amount adjustment telop and the character selection telop are displayed while the predetermined image is displayed (NO9). The display content of NO9 is the same as that of NO4-2. After the display content of NO9 is displayed, the process returns to NO5. In NO5 to NO9, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog is acceptable, and BGM is not flowing.

Hereinafter, the operation of the rear back movable ornament 3110 will be described. At the time of starting the model demo movie in NO5, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves downward and is in a falling state, that is, at the appearance position. After that, in NO6 to NO9, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 maintains the appearance position. Note that in NO9, the rear rear movable ornament 3110 may be moved to the retracted position in order to make the effect display device 1600 easy to see when the screen shifts to the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen. In this case, for example, when the display of the volume light amount adjustment screen and the character selection screen is completed, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position again.

In NO5 to NO9, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 that is not located at the retracted position moves to the retracted position when the game ball B enters the starting opening (first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004). In NO5, when the game ball B enters the starting opening while the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearance position, for example, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is detected at the timing of detecting the ball entering. Raise. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be quickly moved to the retreat position at the same time when the variation corresponding to the entry is started, and the visual effect of the variation using the effect display device 1600 is not obstructed as much as possible. I'm done.

Further, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the starting opening while the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once dropped to the appearance position. You may raise after making it do. This is because, if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 that is descending makes an irregular motion that suddenly ascends at the same time as the ball enters, some players misunderstand this as a production with high expectation for a big hit.

In addition, the operation of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 may be determined according to the variation pattern of the variation executed by the entry. For example, a variation pattern in which an effect of lowering the back-back movable decorative body 3110 when the variation starts is described. In NO5 to NO9, the variation pattern is selected in which the game ball B enters in the state where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is located at the appearance position, and an effect of lowering the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 at the start of variation is executed. It has been done.

In this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is executed. When the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, it is desirable to execute the descending effect without canceling it in this way (that is, to cause the descending effect to be delayed). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, light emission of a predetermined lamp attached to the back-back movable decorative body 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from a speaker) may be performed. The rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position while performing a specific irregular effect.

Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, even if a specific irregular operation of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 (for example, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is moved up and down a predetermined number of times with a predetermined amplitude). Good. Even if the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by performing these irregular processes instead of the descending effect. Further, in the first place, in NO5 to NO9, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the retracted position, a variation pattern in which the effect of lowering the back-rear movable ornament 3110 at the start of variation is executed (the descending effect is performed at the start of variation. Selection of an effect pattern) may be prohibited. Further, although the selection of the variation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that the descending effect is produced), the descending effect may not be executed when the variation pattern is selected. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that the descending effect may have been selected even if the descending effect has not been executed.

Further, in NO5, the variation pattern in which the game ball B enters the starting opening while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 moves to the appearance position and the back-removable decoration 3110 descends at the start of the variation. The same applies when is selected.

Specifically, in this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is performed. Execute. It should be noted that before the rise, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 may be once moved to the appearance position (that is, the descending effect is delayed and generated). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. It should be noted that the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be moved once to the appearance position before the rising. Further, in such a case, in the first place, the selection of the variation pattern (the production pattern in which the descending production is executed at the start of the variation) may be prohibited.

Further, in NO5 to NO9, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located below the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting opening, and when the fluctuation starts, another movable body (back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and It is assumed that a variation pattern in which an effect that different movable bodies are moved to the movable range of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is selected at the time of entering the ball. In this case, for example, by moving the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position first, and then moving the other movable bodies, interference between the movable bodies is avoided. Further, when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is at the appearance position and the other movable body (a movable body different from the back-rear movable decoration body 3110) does not interfere with the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 at the appearance position. The other back movable movable body 3110 is moved to the retracted position after the other back movable body returns to the initial position while the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position. May be. In such a case, the movement of the back rear movable decoration 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of the movable body different from the back rear movable decoration 3110 may be performed at the same time.

In addition, for example, in the variation pattern (effect pattern), the other movable body (a movable body different from the back rear movable decoration body 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the irregular effect or the irregular operation described above may be performed on the back-back movable decorative body 3110 or the other movable body. Further, in such a case, in the first place, the selection of the variation pattern (effect pattern) in which the effect that another movable body moves to the movable range of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation may be prohibited.

In addition, when the back rear movable ornament 3110 is at the appearance position, a part of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Therefore, in NO5 to NO9, some players feel that the visual display state of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not good, and such a player feels that he or she wants to see the image in the good visual state.

For such a player, the game ball B enters the starting opening (when the game ball B enters the starting opening, the fluctuation starts and these images (for example, the model demo movie stop shown in FIG. 242 is stopped. The rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position by a trigger other than (for the end of the time image, etc.). As a specific trigger, for example, there is an operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) or the like.

If the game ball B wins in the starting opening while the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 is being raised to the retracted position by a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting opening, the back-side moving operation is possible. The decorative body 3110 continues the raising operation as it is, for example, and returns to the retracted position. In addition, while the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the retracted position, the game ball B wins the starting opening, and the effect pattern determined based on the winning is descended the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. In the case of the effect pattern to be performed, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 may be lowered after the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is continuously returned to the retracted position. The descending effect may be executed even during the ascending of 3110. Further, when the game ball B wins the starting opening in a state in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has returned to the retracted position by a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting opening, for example, as it is, Maintain the retracted position.

The decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position (the decorative pattern of NO2 is also shown in the stop image of NO9) is, for example, at the end of fluctuation (NO2. It may be displayed in a reduced size as compared with (the pattern shown by) or may be displayed in the same size. When the decorative design is displayed in a reduced size, the display size of the decorative design is changed, for example, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 starts to descend in NO5, when it finishes descending, or when the final design of NO3 is displayed. .. Also, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, it may be displayed in an area that does not overlap the movement range of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, but even in the case of a reduced display, it is displayed in the movement range of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110. You may make it overlap.

In NO5 to NO9, the example in which the rear back movable decoration body 3110 is located on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 has been described, but other movable bodies may be used instead of or in addition to the rear rear movable decoration body 3110. It may be located in front of 1600. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are located on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, it is preferable that the plurality of movable bodies do not overlap (contact) with each other after the movement. Further, in NO5 to NO9, since the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body that cannot visually recognize the image is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to make the explanation for the player such as the volume light amount adjustment telop invisible. Even in the case where the position after the movement overlaps with the position where such an explanation is displayed, it is moved to the front face of the effect display device 1600 once in NO5, and when such an explanation is displayed, The movable body may be returned to the original position. Further, the position and size of the explanation display for the player such as the volume light amount adjustment telop may be changed according to the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume adjustment method]
Another example of the volume adjusting method will be described below. FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of screen transition for volume control. (A) is a state in which the decorative design confirmed after the fluctuation is stopped, that is, a state of NO3 in FIG. 242. (B) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, that is, a state of NO4-1 in FIG. 242.

(C) is a state in which the loop image and the character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. The difference from NO4-2 in FIG. 242 is that the volume light amount adjustment telop is not displayed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of (C), the screen changes to the character selection screen. In the example of FIG. 243, volume adjustment (adjustment and setting of output sound output from various speakers is performed only after passing through the character selection screen, and subsequent volume adjustment has the same meaning, so parentheses are used. It is different from the example of FIG. 242 in that it cannot be omitted).

(D) is a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 due to the central pressing operation unit 303a being pressed in the state of (C). The character can be selected by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the selected character can be determined by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a.

The character selected here appears on the effect display device 1600 at the time of a predetermined effect, performs a predetermined dialogue effect, or performs a predetermined action. In other words, the presentation mode afterwards changes depending on the selected character. Also, the effect contents (for example, the above-mentioned dialogue and action) when the character appears differ depending on the selected character. Further, for example, the sound volume of the dialogue at the time of production differs for each character. Also, for example, the BGM differs depending on the selected character.

(E) is a state determined by the character by the central pressing operation unit 303a being pressed in the state of (D). When the character is determined, for example, the line of the character is output from the speaker. The dialogue is output at a volume similar to that of the dialogue effect of the character that is performed during a change or the like.

For example, many players feel that the dialogue effect by the character A is noisy even at volume 3 (volume of 5 levels (1 is the minimum volume, 5 is the maximum volume)), and the dialogue effect by the character B is noisy even at the volume 5. Many players feel it. In this way, the volume can be adjusted after actually listening to the dialogue of the character when the character is determined, so that the player can select an appropriate volume for himself.

(F) is a state after the character is selected. After the character is selected, the character selection screen is erased, and a display different from the volume adjustment screen, such as the loop image described above, is displayed. The reason why such a screen is displayed before the state where the screen can be shifted to the volume adjustment screen is to prevent the player from merely adjusting the volume.

Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the character A having a large sound of the dialogue effect is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the screen is switched to the volume adjustment screen immediately after the character A is determined, the player will just work to reduce the volume without thinking. On the other hand, by temporarily displaying a display different from the volume adjustment as described above, the player loses consciousness from the character he/she has selected, so that some players forget about the character they have selected before the volume adjustment becomes possible. There is. In order to reduce the volume of the player while remembering that he/she has selected the character A, when the dialogue of the character A subsequently appears, it is possible to reconfirm that the character selected by the player is the character A. Or you can get delight.

In (G), the loop image, the character selection telop, and the volume light amount adjustment telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (H) is a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the state of (G), and the volume light amount adjustment screen is displayed. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the volume changes, and by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, a light amount adjustment screen is displayed. Although not shown, in the light amount adjustment screen, the light amount is changed by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the central pressure operation unit 303a is pressed to shift to the volume adjustment screen.

(I) is a state where the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. For example, on the volume control screen or the light intensity control screen, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation operation unit 302 or the central pressing operation unit 303a was last operated, the loop image is returned to the displayed state.

In addition, when the variation starts while the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the volume adjustment can be continuously executed, and the image for performing the volume adjustment can improve the visibility of the effect during the change. It can be continuously displayed in a manner that does not significantly hinder it. As a result, the volume adjustment can be performed while confirming the actual volume during the fluctuation.

Although the example in which it is not possible to move to the volume light intensity adjustment screen without going through the character selection screen has been described, in addition to or instead of passing through the character selection screen, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the volume light intensity adjustment screen is moved to. It may not be possible. The specific conditions include, for example, entry of the game ball B into a general winning opening that allows a prize ball to be obtained at the time of entry, passage of a predetermined time, and the like (or a combination thereof).

It should be noted that the predetermined time may be lengthened or shortened depending on, for example, the operation status of the operation means operable by the player. If the volume (output sound) can be changed, the volume (output sound) may be changed thereafter without going through the character selection screen. Further, the changed volume (output sound) may end at the end of the change of the specific number of times. Note that, in the changing specific effect, the effect may be progressed with the volume (output sound) specific to the specific effect instead of the selected volume (output sound). Further, after the character is selected and before the transition to the volume adjustment screen, a predetermined operation may be performed on a predetermined operation unit to increase the number of volume patterns selectable on the volume adjustment screen ( For example, when the predetermined operation is not executed, the volume of 5 levels (output sound) can be selected, but when the predetermined operation is executed, the volume of 10 levels (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Up-and-coming production]
Hereinafter, the stand-up effect will be described. The stand-up effect is one of the effects executed during the SP reach (a special effect, and the SP reach that appears in the following description also corresponds to the special effect). SP reach is a reach effect that is more likely to be selected in the big hit variation and is less likely to be selected in the outlier variation, as compared to the normal reach effect. That is, the SP reach is a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit compared to a normal reach production. In the stand-up effect, a display indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when a dialogue “Ka-ra-no-” described later is displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the dialogue is displayed. The jackpot expectation displayed in is promoted.

FIG. 244 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stand-up effect. (A) is a state in which the production is started during SP reach and the effect has started. On the effect display device 1600, for example, the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in a blurred state. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the effect display device 1600 changes. The background color after the change is blue or red. In addition, it is assumed that the higher the jackpot expectation of the variation is, the more easily red is selected as the background color after the change rather than blue.

Subsequently, in (C), a dialogue "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image and the background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are erased. Note that in (C), the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the background color may be continuously displayed. When the dialogue is displayed, the jackpot expectation is promoted thereafter. Subsequently, in (D), the line is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed again in a blurred state. For example, the background color of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is promoted from blue to red at the timing when the line is erased from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the blurred image and the background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are erased, and the large image of the red central pressing operation unit 303a (large red push display) is clearly displayed in the effect display device. Displayed at 1600, the user is prompted to press the central pressing operation unit 303a. Note that the images of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed at this time include, for example, a small blue image (small blue push display), a large blue image (large blue push display), a large red image (large red display). Push display) and a large rainbow-colored image (rainbow large push display). It is assumed that the jackpot expectation becomes higher in the order of blue small push display, blue large push display, red large push display, and rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only in the big hit variation.

In the state of (E), when the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation valid state and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, it is announced whether the variation in execution is a jackpot variation or a deviation variation. To be done. In (F), it is announced that the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation.

In addition, in (A), a blurred image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, and in (E), immediately before a clear image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. Also, the effect from the display of a clear image of the central pressing operation unit 303a to the end of the display of the image is also referred to as button display effect.

FIG. 245 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the stand-up effect. In the example of FIG. 244, the line “Ka-ra-no-” is displayed in the fanning effect, and the background color in the fanning effect is promoted. However, in the example of FIG. The dialogue "No ~" is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

Since (A) and (B) are the same as those in FIGS. 244(A) and (B), respectively, description thereof will be omitted. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are erased, and a large blue push image is displayed in a clear state on the effect display device 1600, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. You are encouraged to do so.

Subsequently, in (D), the dialogue "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to overlap the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. In addition, in (D), in order to concentrate the player's consciousness on the line "ka-ra-no-", the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the display prompting the pressing may be deleted. Subsequently, in (E), the dialogue "Ka-ra-no-" is deleted from the effect display device 1600, and the blue large push image is promoted to the red large push image at the timing when the dialogue is deleted. .. Since (F) is the same as FIG. 244(F), description is omitted.

When performing the promotion effect during the button display effect, the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is effective in the period from the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect to the appearance of the promotion effect. It may or may not be valid. Since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is effective during the period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to know the winning result quickly. Further, since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is invalid during the period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to enjoy the effect until the end, and the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. If the operation is invalid, it is confirmed that the promotion effect is performed, and the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

In this way, in order to avoid deciding that the promotion effect will be performed when the operation is invalid despite the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a being displayed, the button display is performed. Regardless of whether or not the promotion effect is performed during the effect, the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be enabled for a predetermined time after the button display effect is started.

In the rising effect, there may be a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. The type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a that can be displayed in the button display effect may be different between when the tilting effect is executed and when only the button display effect is executed without executing the tilting effect. ..

Specifically, for example, in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, only the blue large push, the red large push, and the rainbow large push can be displayed in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, Suppose that a small push, a blue big push, a red big push, and a rainbow big push can be displayed. Accordingly, the pattern in which the stirrup effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the pattern in which the stirrup effect is not executed.

Further, in such a case, it is desirable that the pattern in which the agitation effect is executed has a higher appearance frequency than the pattern in which the agitation effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. This is because, as described above, the pattern in which the stirrup effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit. In addition, for example, in a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, BGM is flowing in the button display effect, but in a pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, BGM is flown in the fanning effect, but BGM is stopped in the button display effect, and there is no sound. It is desirable to put it in a state. As a result, it is possible to create a feeling of tension in the button display effect in the pattern in which the fanning effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed.

In addition, for example, when the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, in a pattern in which the slanting effect is executed, and when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, The pattern in which the effect of vibrating the vibration speaker 354 is executed may be executed.

FIG. 246 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which the promotion effect in the rising effect is performed. The promotion effect can be executed, for example, at any of timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 246. Timing 1 is immediately after the insulting effect is started (for example, the timing of (A) in FIG. 244 or the timing immediately after (B) is started). At timing 1, the player cannot recognize or slightly recognizes the first background color in the stirrer effect, so when the promotion effect is performed at timing 1, the player is less aware of the background color. It can give a sense of surprise.

Timing 2 is the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the stirrup effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 244(C)). At the timing 2, since the player can completely recognize the first background color in the stirrup production, for example, when the background color is blue, the player is discouraged, but the promotion production is performed at the timing 2. This can eliminate this discouragement.

Timing 3 is the same as the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing at the start of FIG. 245(C)). In the example of FIG. 246, it is assumed that the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a ends at the same time when the button display effect ends.

At the timing 3, since the player is not able to recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3. You can Further, when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3, at least the image with the lowest expectation of a big hit (blue small push) despite the timing at which the player has not yet recognized the image type of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Since it is confirmed that there is no such thing, a feeling of elation can be obtained.

Timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing immediately after the start of FIG. 245(C)). Timing 4 is, for example, a timing when the player can operate the central pressing operation unit 303a, for example, 0.008 seconds after the start of the button display effect, but it is difficult. At the timing 4, since the player is in a state in which the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect is not recognized, when the promotion effect occurs, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

Further, for the player who knows that promotion effect may occur at the timing 4, for example, before the button display effect is started, the central pressing operation unit 303a is repeatedly hit, and the effective period starts. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game property of whether or not the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a can be performed before the promotion effect.

Timing 5 is a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button display effect (however, the first half of the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At the timing 5, since the player can completely recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a, for example, when the image is a small push blue, the player is discouraged, but at the timing 5, promotion effect. This discouragement can be eliminated by performing.

Timing 6 is a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button display effect (however, the latter half of the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At the timing 6, since a considerable amount of time has passed since the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a was displayed, it is possible to show the promotion effect to the player who is half giving up on the appearance of the promotion effect. Therefore, a sense of surprise can be provided.

Timing 7 is immediately before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at the timing 7, for example, even if the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who is not willing to operate the central pressing operation unit 303a. .. Further, for example, if the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a does not start until the promotion effect occurs even if the button display effect starts, the freeze effect is executed by executing the promotion effect at timing 6 or timing 7. It is possible to realize a production like a production and to make the player have a strong expectation.

When the promotion effect is executed after the button display effect is started, the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be used as a trigger for executing the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7), the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is invalid. It is said that Then, at the timing of promotion effect, the effective period of the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed within the valid period, promotion effect is generated, and the operation is invalid during the promotion effect. Then, the button image after promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation valid period starts again. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, the winning result in the fluctuation is notified.

Further, for example, although the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the time of starting the button display effect, the central pressing is performed after the start of the button display effect and before the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, promotion effect may occur. After that, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period after the button image after promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the winning result in the change is notified. In addition, it is desirable that the pattern in which the promotion effect is performed after the start of the button display effect is selected only when the big hit changes (that is, the big hit is determined). If the pattern is selected in the outlier variation, the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a in the expectation that the winning result will be announced by the button effect, but the player unexpectedly develops (whether it is a big hit or not). This is because there is a risk that it may become a shoulder watermark due to the fact that the development is not announced.

Further, for example, although the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the time of starting the button display effect, the central pressing is performed after the start of the button display effect and before the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect that expects the promotion effect to occur (for example, a serif effect such as "Don't be impatient! I'll be promoted soon!") may be executed. In such a case, the promotion effect is not performed at the timing when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed as described above, but is performed at the predetermined promotion timing.

Further, for example, when the promotion effect occurs after the start of the button display effect, immediately after the line "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the promotion effect is executed once again after the promotion, and thereafter. The button display effect may be executed again. In this case, the promotion target by the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the last fanning effect, the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, or both. Good.

Specifically, for example, when the stirrup production ends with a blue background, and "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display production, then it is promoted to a red background. The stirrer effect may be performed, and the button display effect in which the blue small push display is displayed may be performed. In addition, specifically, for example, in the case where the fanning effect ends with a blue background, and “ka-ra-no-” is displayed after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, then the blue background is displayed. The stirrer effect may be performed again, and the button display effect in which the red large push display is displayed may be performed.

Further, in the above-described example, an example has been described in which the promotion effect is performed by only one of the stirrup effect and the button display effect, but the promotion effect may be performed by both of them. In addition, the promotion effect may be executed a plurality of times within the one stirrer effect and the one button display effect. In addition, although the example in which the background color changes as the agitation effect has been described, in addition to the background color, the background color is displayed before the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed and overlaps with the area in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. It is not necessary to be concerned with the background color, such as by changing the color of the effect displayed in (such as the effect of gathering light).

[15. Hold notice production]
[15-1. Hold notice production by change of hold color]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the hold display mode is displayed until the hold display is consumed. By changing the, it is possible to execute the pending notice effect that suggests the jackpot expectation for the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the pending display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, the hold change effect that suggests the possibility of changing the display mode of the hold display can be executed.

Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), the main control board 1310 transmits a reservation number designation command and a preliminary determination command. .. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the command analysis process of step S601, when the hold number designation command and the preliminary determination command are received, the hold advance notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command. (Hold memory count) and pre-judgment information specified from the pre-judgment command (big hit, small hit, reach lost, lost) corresponding to the pending notice decision table selected, the judgment set in the pending notice decision table By comparing the value with the read random number for determining the pending notice, the type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined.

In the hold advance notice determination table, the determination value is assigned to each hold advance notice pattern differently for each piece of advance determination information (big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified by the advance determination command. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

Further, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), the number of holdings (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command is increased, thereby producing an effect display. One hold display is additionally displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command decreases. , The hold display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display is displayed. Each time the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted, but the decoration design is changed. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changeable. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display, the position at which the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved, like other hold displays. By performing the hold change effect, the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes may be suggested.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 247, 248, and 249, description will be made regarding the holding color determination table in which a plurality of types of holding color patterns are set for each holding number (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command. To do. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 247(A) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins in the starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. FIG. 247(B) is a reserved color determination table that is used when the game ball B wins the starting opening without holding and during the variation execution. FIG. 248(C) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there is one reserved. FIG. 249(D) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are two reservations. FIG. 249(E) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are three reservations. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the pre-determination command to determine the hold color when there is no hold and the variation is not executed.

In the reserved color determination table, a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the reserved color can be changed, a distribution in a hit variation of the pattern, and a distribution in a deviation variation are defined. It should be noted that the start of the change of the hold 1 means that the change is started in a state where the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the first hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). Is. Similarly, the start of the change of the hold 2 starts the change in a state where the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the second hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed by the next successive change). It's time. Similarly, the start of the change of the hold 3 indicates that the change is in a state in which the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the third hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed three times ahead of the change). It's time to start.

The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. It should be noted that the allocation in the reserved color determination table is predetermined so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher in the order of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent. In addition, the rainbow color is predetermined to be selected only when the big hit changes.

In addition, in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, a change to a reserved color with a low jackpot expectation is not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color becomes blue, it does not return to white. This is because if there is a possibility that the reserved color with a low jackpot expectation degree may change, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation even if the reserved color has a high expectation degree.

Further, in the reserved color determination table, there is a pattern in which a plurality of stages of color promotion are executed. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern in which, from the state where the reserved color is white, blue and green are skipped and the color changes to red. Due to the existence of such a pattern, for example, at the final timing of the change of the reserved color, even if the white color remains, there is still a possibility that the color will be changed to a color with a high expectation for a big hit at a stretch. Expectations can be maintained to the end.

In addition, for example, the hold color of blue or more may be selected only in the reach variation, or the hold color of red or more may be selected only in the variation in which the SP reach is executed. In addition, when a variation is suspended in a state where a big hit variation is included in the variations being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU forcibly changes all the retained color change patterns for the variation to white (that is, The pattern may be determined to be a standard color).

FIG. 250 is an example of a pending color determination table during change. In the changing pending color determination table, a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the variable pending color can be changed during the execution of the variation, a distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, a distribution in the out variation, and a variation pattern for each variation It is defined for each hold color at the start. That is, the peripheral control MPU determines the pending color change pattern being changed according to the reserved color at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation, and whether the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation or a deviation fluctuation.

In the example of FIG. 250, three promotion timings are defined for each variation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may be different for each variation pattern. Also, the promotion timing itself may be different for each variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the SP reach is varied, the promotion timing includes, for example, when the reach is established, when the SP reach is developed, and when the second half of the SP reach is started. The big hit expectation degree and the change pattern of each reserved color are the same as those in the reserved color determination table.

FIG. 251 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preliminary announcement effect by changing the pending color. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is not held and the fluctuation is performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002 while the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the reserved color determination table of FIG. 247(B) is referred to, and the reserved color at the time of winning and at the start of variation is determined to be green.

(C) is a state in which the variation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which the fluctuation corresponding to the green hold is started. (E) is a state in which reach has been developed in the fluctuation. In (E), the hold remains green. (F) is a state in which SP reach is developed in the fluctuation. In (F), the hold remains green. (G) is a state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of SP reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Pending notice production due to gacha coin change]
Up to this point, the pending notice effect by the change in the pending color has been described. In the following, the hold notice effect is displayed when the hold is displayed as a gacha coin and the hold is changed. In the pending notice effect, for example, when a prize is won, a hold is displayed in the form of a coin (hereinafter referred to as a gacha coin), and when the hold moves, the number of coins increases or a coin different from the normal form (hereinafter , Called rare gacha coins).

Then, for example, at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold, in the effect display device 1600, the same number of gacha coins as the number of gacha coins and rare gacha coins are executed to obtain the same number of pending displays. Then, the hold display showing the fluctuation currently being executed changes to the hold display of the color having the highest jackpot expectation among the acquired hold displays. It should be noted that not only the change of the hold display to the color having the highest jackpot expectation but also the change to the hold display of any of the displayed hold displays may be performed. It should be noted that although the gacha coins and rare gacha coins are held, the gacha coins and rare gacha coins may be held without performing the gacha at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the holding.

A gacha coin holding determination table in which a plurality of types of gacha coin holding patterns are set for each holding number (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 252, 253, and 254. .. The gachacoin hold determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 252(A) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening while there is no hold and the change is not executed. FIG. 252(B) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening without holding and during the variation execution. FIG. 253(C) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there is one hold. FIG. 254(D) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are two holds. FIG. 254(E) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are three holds. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the pre-determination command to determine the suspension of gacha coins when there is no suspension and variation is not being executed.

The gachacoin hold determination table, like the hold color determination table, a pattern indicating the type and number of gachacoins at the timing when the hold color can be changed, distribution in hit variation of the pattern, and distribution in outlying variation, Is defined.

The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of gacha coins at each timing according to the type and number of gacha coins indicated by the pattern. In addition, in order to increase the jackpot expectation in the order of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins, the allocation in the gacha coin holding decision table is predetermined. Has been. Further, even five rare gacha coins with the highest jackpot expectation degree may be selected according to the deviation.

It should be noted that, similar to the holding color determination table, in each pattern of the gachacoin holding determination table, a change to a gachacoin with a low jackpot expectation is not performed. Further, similar to the reserved color determination table, the gacha coin pending determination table has a pattern in which promotion of gacha coins in multiple stages is executed. Also, if the fluctuation is suspended while the big hit fluctuation is included in the fluctuations that are being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU will forcibly display the normal white suspension instead of the gachacoin suspension. You may do it.

In the illustrated gacha coin hold determination table, when the gacha coin hold is displayed, the gacha coin is always displayed from the time of winning, but for example, a normal white hold is displayed at the time of winning. There may be a pattern in which the hold is changed to the gacha hold by the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the hold is started. However, it is desirable that there is no pattern that changes into gacha coins after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because there is a risk that the reserved color may lower the sense of expectation that the color has been promoted.

FIG. 255 is an example of a gachacoin reserved color correspondence table. In the gachacoin reserved color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gachacoins at the start of fluctuation and the pending color with the highest jackpot expectation among the pending displays obtained by the Gacha at the start of fluctuation, and the jackpot fluctuation and deviation. The distribution in which the corresponding correspondence is selected for each fluctuation is defined.

The gachacoin reserved color correspondence table is defined so that a situation in which only a white pending display can be obtained will not occur even though a gachacoin gacha-gacha is executed. This is because if such a situation occurs, the player will not be able to expect the production of playing the Gacha Gacha.

It should be noted that "coin" in the reserved color column indicates that the change is executed while the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is displayed in the reserved state without executing the gacha. In the gachacoin hold decision table, the jackpot expectation is set to be low when the GachaCoin is not executed, but the GachaCoin is executed in the case of 5 rare gachacoins, which is the mode with the highest jackpot expectation, as shown in FIG. 255. If not, the jackpot may be set to be confirmed. Further, the gachacoin reserved color correspondence table does not have to include the pattern in which the gacha-coin is not executed. That is, in this case, when a pending display of gacha coins or rare gacha coins appears, it is always changed to a pending display having a jackpot expectation degree of blue pending or higher.

In addition, as for the big hit change, the change to the "coin" that indicates that the change is executed with the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin displayed while the hold is not executed is 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins. Any of the number of coins, five gacha coins, one rare gacha coin, and five rare gacha coins is set to be lower than the rate of changing to a colored pending display (in the case of one coin, 32/ At 128 it remains a coin, but at 96/128 it changes to some color). This is because the expectation is generally higher when the display is changed to the colored hold display, so that it is possible to suppress the end of coins as much as possible.

By the distribution shown by the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, the reserved color with the highest jackpot expectation is determined for the plurality of reserved displays obtained using the plurality of gacha coins or the rare gacha coins. The color of the hold display other than the hold color having high expectation is randomly determined, for example.

Specifically, for example, if three coins have been acquired and it is decided to display red as the reserved color, the reserved color indicated by the remaining two coins is expected to exceed red. It means that it is randomly selected from "coins", "blue", "green", and "red" excluding the iridescent color. Also, instead of random, for example, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are pattern 1, “green”, “green” and “red” are pattern 2, and “blue”, “red” and “red” are pattern 3 in advance. It is also possible to provide a plurality of patterns for each number of coins and the final color, and to decide from among them. Further, when the reserved color with the highest jackpot expectation is not determined (when one of the displayed reserved colors is determined), for example, the pattern 2 is more easily promoted to red than the pattern 1 or the like. It is recommended to set up.

It should be noted that in the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, all reserved display colors acquired by a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins may be defined. In this case, even if the holding color with the highest jackpot expectation is the same, the distribution is preferably set so that the jackpot expectation becomes higher as the number of holding displays having the holding color is larger (specifically, For example, using three gachacoins, you get the "red, red, red" hold display than when you get the "red, blue, white" hold display and the hold display changes to red. When the hold display changes to red, the big hit expectation is higher.)

The change pattern of the hold display in the change after the change to the colored normal hold display at the start of the change by gacha coins or rare gacha coins is determined using the changing hold color determination table in FIG. 250. That is, even in the case of the gacha coin holding notice, the holding change pattern based on the holding color is used after changing to the colored normal holding display, as in the case where the holding color change notice continues. However, for each pattern of the changing pending color determination table in FIG. 250, even when the gachacoin pending notice is passed and when it is not passed, the distribution of each pattern when the big hit is changed and the distribution when the variation is out of sync are different. Good.

In the example described above, the effect that the gachacoin hold is changed to the holding color display by the Gacha-coin is performed at the start of the change of the hold corresponding to the gachacoin, but is performed at another timing after the start of the change. Good. The timing may be, for example, immediately before the reach is established, immediately after the reach is established, or when the SP reach is developed when the SP reach is executed. However, for example, when an image that prompts the operation of the specific operation unit is displayed during the reach effect and the effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is executed, the last relevant timing must be before the start of the display of the image. Is desirable.

In addition, for example, if the final holding color is the same, the holding color will be higher so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the gachacoin holding notice is sent than when the gachacoin holding notice is not sent. It is desirable that the distribution is set in the determination table, the gachacoin reserved color correspondence table, and the like.

In the above-mentioned example, the number of stages of holding gacha coins (5 stages of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins) and the number of reserved colors (White, blue, green, red, iridescent five levels) are the same, but may be different. When the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages for which gachacoin is reserved is larger. Eventually, the gachacoin hold also changes to a hold for colored display, so that the player recognizes the final jackpot expectation by holding the colored display. In other words, if there are many stages of reserved colors, it is difficult for the player to grasp the final jackpot expectation unless the player remembers the order of jackpot expectations of all colors.

Although not shown, in the peripheral control ROM, for example, as a suspension at the time of winning, a distribution to select a gacha coin suspension display and a distribution to select a normal suspension display (colored suspension including white) And a table defined for each fluctuation pattern is stored. The peripheral control MPU refers to the table to select the gachacoin hold display or the normal hold display, and depending on the selected display mode, refers to the gachacoin hold color correspondence table or the hold color determination table to change the hold. Determine the pattern.

Although the expected jackpot when the Gachacoin hold display is selected is generally higher than the expected jackpot when the normal hold display is selected, the Gachacoin hold with the lowest jackpot expectation (Gacha It is assumed that the highest-ranking hold (red) that can be selected even when the deviation of the normal hold display is larger than the one coin) has a higher jackpot expectation.

FIG. 256 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gacha coin holding notice effect. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is not held and the fluctuation is performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002 while the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the gachacoin hold determination table of FIG. 252(B) is referred to, and the hold display at the time of winning is set to "1 gachacoin" and the hold display at the start of variation is set to "3 gachacoin". 255 is a diagram when red is determined as the reserved color in FIG. 255. FIG.

(C) is a state in which the variation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which the fluctuation corresponding to the holding changed to the gacha coin has started. At the start of the change, the hold display, which was “1 gacha coin”, is changed to “3 gacha coins”. (E) is a state in which the gacha-coin production is executed three times using three gacha coins. The gacha coin holding color correspondence table is referred to, and the holding color with the highest jackpot expectation is determined to be green. Therefore, in (E), the one with the highest jackpot expectation is green among the three pending displays obtained in the Gagging production.

(F) is a continuation state of the fluctuation. The pending display corresponding to the fluctuation has changed to green, which has the highest jackpot expectation among the three pending displays obtained in the Gacha production. (G) is a state in which reach has been developed in the fluctuation. In (G), the hold remains green. (H) is a state in which SP reach is developed in the fluctuation. In (H), the hold remains green. (I) is a state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of SP reach, the hold turned red.

Since the change mode of the hold display after the gacha coin hold notice is changed to the normal hold display (colored hold display including white) is the same as that when the gacha coin hold notice is not passed, (G), (H ) And (I) are similar to FIGS. 251 (E), (F), and (G), respectively. Note that, in addition to this, for example, the three reserved displays obtained in the Gacha production are “blue”, “green”, and “red”, and the state of FIG. 256(F) is changed to red display, as shown in FIG. 256(G). The timing at which the color is promoted, such as indicating the final color before the start of the reach shown in, may be appropriately determined.

[16. Reach collapse simulated production]
Hereinafter, the reach collapse pseudo continuous production will be described. First, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. Pseudo continuous effect is an effect that the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. .. “Ending the variation of the decorative design” means, for example, a mode in which a part or the whole of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative design is once finished, and the decorative design. In some cases, the pseudo-relational pattern (the pattern in which the pseudo-relation is determined if this symbol is stopped) is stopped, and the like. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous effects, and the Mth decorative pattern variation in the N consecutive pseudo continuous effects (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as the M-th consecutive pseudo continuous effect.

Also, while the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is changing once, while actually suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again, the operation is actually executed again. The effect that is not performed is called “pseudo-gase effect”. There is also a pseudo gasse effect in which two consecutive pseudo continuous effects are executed, but the third consecutive pseudo continuous effect is suggested but the third continuous pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect” or “pseudo continuous”.

Pseudo continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is performed again during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design may stop the pseudo continuous design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" in the middle decorative pattern as a pseudo continuous pattern. It should be noted that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even and the reach does not occur) may be the pseudo continuous symbol.

Whether or not pseudo-run is executed and the number of pseudo-runs when pseudo-run is executed in each change is defined in the change pattern. Further, the variation pattern selection rate in the variation pattern table is determined such that the larger the number of pseudo-repetitions, the higher the jackpot expectation.

FIG. 257 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the reach collapse pseudo-serial effect. FIG. 257(A) shows a state in which the fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative design is stopped, and the right decorative design is the same as the left decorative design, for example, it is about to stop in a swaying manner (it is about to reach). In (C), the decorative pattern is maintained in the state of (B), and an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(D) is a state immediately after the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (C). The decorative pattern, which is about to reach, starts to change again, and a display (“×2!”) indicating that the second pseudo link has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative design is stopped again, and the right decorative design is the same as the left decorative design, for example, it is about to stop in a swinging manner. Also, a display (“×2”) indicating that the second pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (E), and the effect display device 1600 displays an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a.

It is assumed that the same effect is repeated and the fourth pseudo run is performed. In (G), the decorative pattern is maintained in the state of (E), and an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A display (“×4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(H) is a state in which although the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (G), the decorative pattern that is about to reach is not broken and the reach is formed. The reach state is formed with an even number of decorative patterns. In addition, it is assumed that the decorative pattern has a large expected value of the payout ball obtained in the big hit in the order of even number, odd number other than 7, and 7 number. A display (“×4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Although it has been described that it is about to reach (the upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative patterns are slightly different), from the state of being reach (the upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative patterns are the same), FIG. As in (c), an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 258 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach symbol promotion effect that is executed subsequent to the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect. The reach design promotion effect is an example of SP reach. FIG. 258(I) shows a state where the reach symbol promotion effect has started. The characters “Promote reach pattern!” are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the reach pattern promotion effect, for example, even reach is promoted to odd reach or 7 reach, or odd reach is promoted to 7 reach. Here, the order of even reach<odd reach<7 reach is advantageous (for example, a big hit is easy). In particular, this 7-reach will be a very intense performance (for example, a jackpot expectation of over 80%). In addition, in (I), since the reach collapse effect is finished, the display indicating the number of pseudo consecutive times is erased from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (J), an image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that a white effect image is displayed on the background of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Further, in (J), for example, the decorative pattern in the reach is displayed in a swaying manner.

(K) is a state in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (J) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach pattern has been promoted (“promotion!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, the decorative pattern has been promoted to odd reach. In addition, the color of the background effect image changes from white to blue.

For example, the color of the effect image of the reach pattern promotion effect background is white for even reach, blue for odd reach other than 7, and red for 7 reach. Even if the reach symbol fails to be promoted, the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) based on the reach symbol is performed, the winning is announced, and the symbol is determined.

Then, in (L), the character "promote reach symbol!!" is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in (M), an image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, at this time, for example, the decorative pattern in the reach is displayed in a swinging manner.

(N) is a state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (M) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach pattern has been promoted (“promotion!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, the decorative design has been promoted to 7 reach. In addition, the color of the background effect image changes from blue to red. Although illustration is omitted, after that, reach effect with 7 symbols (for example, SP reach effect) is performed, and the winning is announced and the symbol is fixed.

It should be noted that the first reach period in which the reach collapse pseudo-representation, which is an effect of the same mode (reach symbol mode) that is repeatedly performed, is performed, and the final reach symbol is finalized from the end of the first period (reach symbol promotion effect. Comparing the second period up to the last) with the second period, it is desirable that the second period is longer. Since the player pays the most attention to the winning result of the fluctuation, if the second period in which the winning result is more directly notified is longer, the player's interest can be maintained and the above-mentioned 7 Since the reach jackpot expectation is set to an unprecedented value, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of uplift for a longer period in the second period than in the first period.

In addition, it is desirable that the number of times the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the first period is greater than the number of times that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the second period. The longer the time from the start of fluctuation to the prompting of the operation of the operating unit, the more the player tends to think that if the operation of the operating unit is prompted, the player may be notified of the result of the change. .. Therefore, if the number of times of prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is large in the second period where the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation is long, the player has to be prepared for each operation, which may cause tiredness. The number of times is as described above.

Further, it is desirable that the time interval between the effects that prompt the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a that is repeatedly performed in the first period is shorter than the time interval between the effects that prompts the central pressing operation unit 303a that is repeatedly performed in the second period. Hereinafter, the effect of urging the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is also referred to as an operation request effect. As described above, the second period is more direct than the first period to notify the winning result. Therefore, if time is spent between the operation request effects in the first period, the player's interest will increase. Because it cannot maintain. In addition, as the time interval between the effects that promote the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a that is repeatedly performed in the first period, the effect that prompts the first central pressing operation unit 303a in the second period after the end of the first period is displayed. For the same reason, it is said that it is shorter than the time interval until the time.

Further, it is desirable that the operation valid period in the one operation request performance in the second period is longer than the operation valid period in the one operation request performance in the first period. This is because the second period is a more direct presentation of the winning result than the first period, and therefore, there is a player who wants to perform the pressing operation in the second period slowly with a feeling of tension.

Depending on the content of the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect (for example, the pseudo continuous number is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 times)), even if the SP reach is subsequently developed, the operation request production may not be executed. However, it is desirable that the ratio of the operation request effects executed in the SP reach is higher than the ratio of the operation request effects not executed in the later developed SP reach, although the reach collapse pseudo-relation effect has occurred. As a result, the player can be given an uplifting feeling due to the occurrence of the reach collapse pseudo-reproduction.

As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 257 and 258, the display form of the operation request effect in the first period is one type, but the display form of the operation request effect in the second period is a plurality of types (with a blue effect). Display, and display with a red effect).

Also, a timer (may be a gauge or the like) indicating the remaining operation valid period after the operation request effect is started may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the first period is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the second period.

Although not shown, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request performance in the second period, the predetermined movable body may operate according to the winning result. Specifically, for example, if the variation is a big hit, the movable body operates, and if the variation is a deviation, the movable body does not operate. On the other hand, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body does not operate regardless of the winning result.

The movable body may also move when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, but the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period. In this case, the operation mode of the movable body is different (for example, the operation direction and the operation amount of the movable body are different, or the movable body that operates is different).

Further, in the first period, a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach collapses and the pseudo-relation starts. There may be a plurality of such specific effects. In addition, depending on the type of a particular effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit of the variation may be increased, and the next reach collapse may be confirmed.

Further, when a specific effect with high expectation appears, it is desirable that the expectation does not decrease in the specific effect of transition (specifically, for example, when a green cut-in effect appears, blue The cut-in effect does not appear). Further, in the first period, the predetermined movable body may operate when the reach collapses and the pseudo-relation starts. Note that the operation of the movable body may be the same every time, or the operation or the accessory that operates may be different depending on the current number of times of pseudo repetition.

Further, although a plurality of operation request effects are executed in the first period, the time interval between operation request effects may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between operation request effects may be shortened after a predetermined number of times. May be. However, for example, the time interval between the last operation request effect and the last operation request effect may be longer than the time interval between other operation request effects.

[17. Sugoroku Stage Production]
Below, the production during the Sugoroku stage will be explained. The Sugoroku stage is an example of a specific effect state, and the Sugoroku effect is performed during the change to progress the game. Specifically, a map of Sugoroku is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates during fluctuation, and when the rotation stops, only the number indicated by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, A character drawn on Sugoroku's map advances in a square. The effect indicated by the square where the character has stopped is executed in the change or the change being held.

It should be noted that the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 does not necessarily have to be performed in all variations. In a variation in which the rotating motion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is not performed, for example, the character does not move the square, that is, stays in the same square. In addition, as a trigger for starting the Sugoroku stage, you may move to the Sugoroku stage with a predetermined probability at the start of fluctuation, or if it is specified that you will stay at the Sugoroku stage for a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the advantageous game state. Alternatively, the process may be performed as a part of the prefetching effect using the above-described pre-determination command.

259 and 260 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect on the Sugoroku stage. (A) is a state immediately before the fluctuation starts. A large decorative pattern is stopped in the center of the effect display device 1600. Nothing is displayed in the Sugoroku square. It is also assumed that there are three pending changes at the time of (A). (B) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. A large decorative pattern starts changing in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the large decorative pattern in the center of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the small decorative pattern changes in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600. In addition, when the large decorative pattern is erased, a display showing the effect contents is displayed in a square. In addition, for example, at the timing, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 starts rotating. At the timing of (B), the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be started.

In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating. The number of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located at the uppermost side indicates the number of squares the character advances. In (D), the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 indicates “2”.

In (E), the character moves two squares. The “x” in the cell after moving two cells indicates that no special effect is performed. Therefore, no special effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is stopped in (F). When the decorative design is stopped, a large decorative design is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (G), in the aspect display device 1600, the camera that shoots the Sugoroku stage moves so that the character is positioned at the last cell of the Sugoroku cells displayed on the effect display apparatus 1600. Perform the performance. At the end of (G), it is the same as (A). Then, the next fluctuation starts at (H). Details of (H) are the same as those of (B). After that, the same effect is repeated.

(I) is a state in which the final fluctuation of the stage is executed, and details are the same as in (C). (J) is a continuation state of the final fluctuation. In (J), a raising operation (an operation different from the rotating operation) is performed so as to approach the holding display area (holding display area for the fluctuation) in the effect display device 1600 while the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated. To do. Note that the ascending operation can be executed only in the final fluctuation. When the ascending operation is performed, the contents of the squares of Sugoroku change to those with a high expectation of a big hit. In the state of (I), the contents of the squares that were “x”, “?”, and “x” are all changed to “reach” in the state of (J).

In addition, the probability that the ascending operation is performed is set to be higher when the final variation is the outlier variation than when it is the big variation, that is, when the final operation is performed when the ascending operation is performed. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation be higher than the jackpot expectation in the case where the raising operation is not performed. Note that, as in (K), the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 may hide a part or all of the reserved display area, or may close the reserved display area but does not hide it.

Further, the ascending operation may be performed after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped (that is, after the number is determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the ascending operation is later than the start of the rotating operation in the final fluctuation. This is because, as described above, the jackpot expectation degree becomes high when the raising operation is performed, and the player can have an expectation that the raising operation is performed even after the rotation operation is started.

(K) is a continuation state of the final fluctuation. In (K), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position while rotating. It should be noted that the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may stop rotating and then return to the initial value. In (K), the hold of the hidden hold display area is changed from the normal display to the blue hold display (the hold display having a higher jackpot expectation than the normal hold display).

Note that the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed even in a variation in a rendering state other than the Sugoroku stage, but from the probability that the rotating operation is performed in each of a plurality of continuous variations in the Sugoroku stage, It is desirable that the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations is set to be lower in the rendering state other than the stage. This is because the player can enjoy Sugoroku more as the character moves more and more squares on the Sugoroku stage.

On the other hand, there may be an effect state in which the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations is set higher than that of the Sugoroku stage. This is because the player can be provided with a sense of surprise because there is an effect state in which the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 that seems to be provided for the Sugoroku stage seems to rotate continuously.

Further, although the example in which the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates is described, an operation of changing the position may be performed instead of an operation of not changing the position such as the rotating operation. For example, the inside-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 may be slightly moved up (the amount of rising is smaller than the rising motion in the final change) while rotating.

[18. Specific zone production]
The effect of the specific zone will be described below. Examples of the specific zone include a pine zone and a super pine zone. The pine zone is, for example, a zone that plunges into the Sugoroku stage of the previous chapter. In addition, the super pine zone is, for example, a zone in which there is a possibility of rushing in regardless of the stage.

Note that, for example, entry into these specific zones is executed as a look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect is an effect in which an effect suggesting the result of the pending change is executed before the pending change starts. Peripheral control MPU, transmitted from the main control MPU, with reference to the special symbol pre-determined command for the suspended special symbol variation, the suspended special symbol variation each hit variation (that is, big hit variation or small hit variation ) Is determined (prefetch determination), and the prefetch effect can be executed based on the determination result.

After entering the pine zone and the super pine zone, the inrush state of these zones continues until a variation corresponding to the prefetch-determined hold (also referred to as a prefetch target variation). It is assumed that there is a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuations corresponding to the pre-determined hold of the pine zone and super pine zone. Further, it is assumed that the expectation of the big hit of the prefetch target change is higher when the user enters the super pine zone than when the player enters the pine zone. In addition, it is desirable that the pine zone and the super pine zone in which the newly-held fluctuation is the pre-reading fluctuation are not executed while the big hit fluctuation is being executed or is being held.

261 and 262 are explanatory views showing an example of a pine zone effect. (A) is a state where the fluctuation during the Sugoroku stage is being executed. The second pending change after the change being executed in (A) is the prefetch target change. From the variation of (A), the prefetching effect for the prefetching target variation is performed. In (A), an effect is performed in which the character is stopped at the square described as "pine zone". (B) is a continuation state of the fluctuation of (A). A display indicating that the player has entered the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. Further, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone (“in pine zone...”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The change ends in (D). Also in the next variation of (C), for example, effects similar to those of (C) and (D) are executed.

(E) is a state where the prefetch target variation has started. Subsequently, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (F) is a state in which the reach is established in the variation of the prefetch target. In the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a specific production with a high jackpot expectation such as the timing when the reach is established is being executed, the display indicating that the pine zone is being stayed is erased, so that the pine zone is stayed until then. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that the specific effect is being executed, to the player who paid great attention to being in the middle. Also, if the fact that the player is staying in the pine zone is constantly displayed, the player's tension may continue to be tired. It should be noted that the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be erased a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time the execution of the pseudo-relation is confirmed.

In other words, before the SP reach effect (the rock-paper-scissors game effect described later) is started, a specific timing (at the time when the reach is established, at the time when the display that confirms the pseudo-representation appears, and when the reach or the pseudo-reaction occurs) It is advisable to erase the display indicating that the pine zone is being stayed once, for example, when performing (emphasized) production related to (1).

In (G), the state of reach is continued. In (G), the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. (G) is the timing at which the player is waiting for whether or not to develop into SP reach. At this timing, the player is staying in the pine zone where the big hit expectation is high You can expect to develop into SP reach by remembering that you are in the Matsu Zone.

(H) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game production that is SP reach has started. The rock-paper-scissors game production is an SP reach that develops due to the change in the pre-reading target in the pine zone and super pine zone. The rock-paper-scissors game production is, for example, an extremely high jackpot expectation among the SP reach productions (for example, a SP jackpot production that is selected only when the jackpot changes and has a next highest jackpot expectation). Even if you enter the pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game performance is not always executed, but when you enter the super-pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game performance is always executed. It has been done.

Further, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors competition production, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the production display device 1600, and is also erased during the rock-paper-scissors competition production. This is because the scissors game production has extremely high expectations for jackpots, and is intended to draw the player's attention to the scissors game production. For this reason, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is set higher at the start of the rock-paper-scissors competition production than when entering the pine zone.

(I) is a continuation of the scissors game production. The shout of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (J), a rock-paper-scissors game is being held, which is directed to the rock-paper-scissors game. The hand of the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (J), the state in which the teammate character wins the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is reported that the variation is a jackpot variation). In (K), the effect display device 1600 informs that the big hit is won, and the decorative design is stopped in the big hit combination.

263 and 264 are explanatory views showing an example of the super pine zone effect. The entry into the super pine zone is executed, for example, as a preliminary announcement effect. Specifically, for example, the hold is displayed with a display of a mode indicating the possibility of entering the supermatsu zone (hereinafter also referred to as supermatsu suggestion hold). It should be noted that a display of a mode in which the hold indicates that the entry into the Chomatsu zone is confirmed (hereinafter, also referred to as Chomatsu confirmed hold), for example, a hold corresponding to the prize at the time of winning is displayed as Chomatsu suggestion hold, When the hold in the normal display mode moves, it changes to the supermatsu suggestion hold.

(A) is a state where the fluctuation is being executed and three fluctuations are suspended. (B) is the state of (A), in which the fluctuation is newly suspended. In (B), the time of winning the new hold is a supermatsu suggestive hold (a hold described as “supermatsu?”. If it is a supermatsu confirmed hold, it is described as “supermatsu!”. And may be displayed in a color (for example, red) different from the standard color (for example, white). Chomatsu suggestion suspension is the suspension of prefetch target variation. (C) is a state in which the fluctuation has ended.

(D) is a state in which the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a continuous state of the fluctuation of (D). In (E), the production display device 1600 is executing a dialogue production (“may be the super pine zone...”) suggesting entry into the super pine zone. (F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (“...”) indicating that the entry into the super pine zone was suggested but the entry into the super pine zone was not possible.

(G) is a state after the next fluctuation of (F) is started. One super pine suggestion hold has moved. In addition, in (G), the line effect (“Is it really the super pine zone!”) suggesting the entry into the super pine zone is displayed again. The dialogue effect in (G) is a presentation having a higher degree of expectation of entering the super pine zone than the dialogue effect in (E). In this way, when performing an effect that suggests entry into the super pine zone a plurality of times, it is desirable that the degree of anticipation of entry into the super pine zone is not lowered in the multiple effects.

In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays a display confirming that the player will enter the super pine zone. As in (H), the super pine suggestion suspension may change to the super pine confirmed suspension at this timing. In the example of FIG. 263, although the super pine suggestion pending is changed to the super pine confirmed pending at the timing when the display confirming that the user is entering the super pine zone appears, the super pine confirmed pending is changed before the timing. Needless to say, may appear. Further, in the example of FIG. 263, the entry to the super pine zone from the suggestion entry to the super pine zone is performed over two variations, but it may be performed once.

In (I), the decorative pattern is displayed in the center, and a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, the supermatsu fixed hold has been changed to a hold display (a red hold display in (I)) having a high expectation. For example, in this state, the fluctuation is digested.

(J) is a state in which the change of the prefetch target has started. (K) is a state in which the reach is established in the variation of the prefetch target. Similar to the pine zone, in the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a specific performance with a high jackpot expectation, such as the timing at which the reach is established, is being performed, the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased It is possible to draw attention to the fact that the specific effect is being executed, to the player who paid great attention to being in the middle. Also, if the super-matsu zone is constantly displayed, the player's tension may continue and the user may get tired. Note that the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone may be erased multiple times. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time the execution of the pseudo-relation is confirmed.

That is, similar to the pine zone described above, before the SP reach effect (the rock-paper-scissors game effect described above) is started, at a specific timing (at the time when the reach is established, at the time when the display that determines the pseudo-relation appears, It is advisable to temporarily erase the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone, for example, when performing (emphasized) production related to the occurrence of reach or pseudo-relation.

In (L), the state where the reach is applied is continued. In (L), similarly to the pine zone, the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. Since the super pine zone is in a state of higher expectation for a big hit than the pine zone, the player can get a feeling of uplifting again by displaying the information while staying in the super pine zone again.

(M) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game production that is SP reach has started. As mentioned above, when you enter the Chomatsu Zone, the rock-paper-scissors game is always executed. In (M), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased again from the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is possible to strongly appeal to the player that the game has started to play in rock-paper-scissors competition.

(N) is the state of continuation of the scissors game production. The shout of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (N), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. As mentioned above, the super pine zone has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pine zone. Therefore, in the rock-paper-scissors game production, the display is performed at the timing when the rock-paper-scissors game is actually performed, so that the player is uplifted by the synergistic effect of the rock-paper-scissors game production and the two highly anticipated productions of the super pine zone. You can get a feeling.

In (O), a rock-paper-scissors game, which is a game of scissors, is being held. The hand of the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (O), the state in which the teammate character wins the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is reported that the variation is a jackpot variation).

Further, in (O), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600. This is because at the timing when the winning result of the fluctuation is already informed, only the winning result is important to the player, and it is not important whether or not the player stays in the Chomatsu zone. In (P), the effect display device 1600 informs that the big hit is won, and the decorative design is stopped in the combination of big hits.

In addition, although the example where the super pine suggestion hold starts after the super pine suggestion hold appears has been explained, if the super pine suggestion hold appears but you can not enter the super pine zone, for example, Even during the corresponding fluctuation, although the super pine zone entry is suggested, the production fails.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, special effects were not executed for fluctuations that were not prefetch target fluctuations while staying in the pine zone or super pine zone, but in these fluctuations, specific effects (for example, start of rock-paper-scissors competition effects) May be performed. Further, the entry into the pine zone and the super pine zone may be executed by a normal production (a part of the production performed within one variation) that is not the look-ahead production. Specifically, for example, a rush suggestion effect, a rush effect, and a rock-paper-scissors game to the pine zone or the super pine zone may be executed with one change.

In addition, since entry to the pine zone is generally performed by the character stopping on the square indicating the pine zone on the Sugoroku stage, it is possible that the pine zone is not indicated by the suspended display like the super pine zone. desirable. If the pending display suggests the pine zone on the Sugoroku stage, the suspended display may suggest the contents of the Sugoroku grid that have not been displayed until after the start of fluctuation, and the fun as a Sugoroku may be reduced. Because there is.

In the pine zone and the super pine zone described above, for example, an example in which the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone is erased at the stage when the reach occurs is explained. An image (for example, reach enhancement effect) different from the display image may be displayed so as to overlap on the higher priority side. The point is that the player can not recognize the indication that he or she is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone (or, although it is displayed in an overlapping manner, it is very slightly staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone). Is visible).

[19. Hold peeping production]
Hereinafter, the hold peep effect, which is an example of the hold notice effect, will be described. FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the reserved looking-in effect. (A) is a state where the variation is being executed. Three variations are withheld in (A). In (B), the character appears from below the effect display device 1600, and one of the reserved display areas is displayed without hiding the reserved display (the reserved display located at the center of the lower portion of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the currently executed change. Part (a part is to completely hide a predetermined number (for example, one) of the four reservations, and/or a part of each of the four reservations (that is, a display of all four reservations is completely reserved). It is hidden). The character may hide the entire reserved display area. Moreover, you may hide the hold display (the hold display located in the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the variation that the character is currently executing.

In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a part of the hold display hidden by the character (the third hold in FIG. 265) is changed to a hold display with a high expectation green hold display. It's changing. (D) is the end of the fluctuation. The decorative pattern is stopped by a combination indicating that the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. As in the example of FIG. 265, in the case where only the on-hold display that is on hold is hidden, it is desirable that the on-hold peep effect is executed only when the change in execution is a deviation change.

In addition, in the variation in which the normal out-of-range variation pattern (variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, about 10 seconds among variation patterns in which no special production such as reach production is performed) is selected, the suspended peep production is executed As shown in the example of FIG. 265, the character does not appear at the start of the change at the start of the change, and appears at a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the start of the change. Also, in the case of a shortened variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special production such as reach production is not executed, the variation time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds)), when the hold peep production is executed, when the variation starts or The character may appear after an extremely short time period (a time period shorter than the above-mentioned 3 seconds) (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation.

Further, before (B), a stir-up effect of the reserved look-in effect may be performed. In the stir production, specifically, for example, a character appears on the production display device 1600 to approach the hold display area but does not hide the hold display area. In addition, although the stirrer effect is performed, the character may disappear afterwards without hiding the reserved display area. In the above-described shortened variation pattern, since the variation time is short, it is desirable that the stirrup production is not performed or is performed in a short time (for example, about 1 second). Further, when such a stirrup effect is performed and the character hides the hold display area, the hold display may be changed without fail.

Also, in the example of FIG. 265, a part of the hold display hidden by the character has changed, but there may be a pattern in which all the hold displays change, or there is a pattern in which all the hold displays do not change. May be.

Even in the case of a hold display of a color having the same jackpot expectation degree, for example, the jackpot expectation degree is higher when the hold peep effect is used than when the hold peep effect is not passed. To do. As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling when the suspended look-in effect is executed. On the contrary, even if the hold display of the color having the same jackpot expectation degree, the jackpot expectation degree may be higher when the hold peep effect is not passed than when the hold peep effect is passed. .. Expectations of the player in the hold peeping production where the probability of big hits is suppressed with a high probability at the time of occurrence or where the hold display always changes, and the normal hold color change production in which occurrence is unpredictable but the big hit expectation is high You can balance the feeling.

Further, as in the example of FIG. 265, in the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to notify that the hold display changes by the fact that the character has retreated from the hold display. If the player suggests that there is a change in the holding color or the changed holding color before the character retreats, the period during which the player feels nervous in the holding peep effect is shortened and interest is reduced. Because.

However, for example, a light emitter different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or LED mounted on the front wall portion 2101 of the starting opening unit 2100, or a lamp or LED provided near the starting opening unit 2100). In the case of causing the effect display device 1600 to emit light in the same color as the reserved color, the luminous body is displayed before the character retreats on the effect display device 1600 (that is, before the changed reserved color is displayed). May be caused to emit light in the reserved color. Normally, the player mainly plays the game while looking at the effect display device 1600. However, the player can feel a sense of expectation by feeling an abnormality caused by a slight change in the color of the light-emitting body that is in sight. ..

Since the aim is to let the player recognize the change in the color of the light-emitting body before the change in the hold color of the effect display device 1600, an effect (control for changing) the hold color of the effect display device 1600 is made. The timing of execution causes the player to change the color of the light emitter before the timing of executing the effect of changing the color of the light emitter, or even at the same timing, before the change of the reserved color of the effect display device 1600. If it can be recognized, there is no problem.

In addition, immediately before the light emitting body emits light, or immediately before the light emitting color of the light emitting body is changed, the light emitting body may emit light in a holding color (for example, white) in a normal display mode. Specifically, for example, when the hold color of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the emission color of the light-emitting body changes from blue to white before the change of the hold color on the effect display device 1600. , And then changes from white to green. In addition, although the example in which the holding color in the normal display mode is white has been described, the color is not limited to white, and any color that is not likely to be selected as the holding color after promotion in this holding change effect does not matter. Further, when displaying white, it does not matter whether it is lit or blinking. If it is lit, the liquid crystal can be watched, and if it is blinking, it is possible to appeal that the pending change is being performed.

In such a case, it is desirable that the time during which the emission color of the light-emitting body emits white light is extremely short (for example, shorter than the shortest variation pattern among all the variation patterns). This is because if the light-emitting body emits white light for a long time, the player may misunderstand that the pending display changes to white, which has a low expectation of a big hit.

In addition, when the hold display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a hold of a special mode that cannot be expressed only by color (for example, super-pine suggestion hold as described above), the light-emitting body is, for example, in the effect display device 1600. Light emission by a color that is not used in the retained color change (for example, when white, blue, green, red, or iridescent retained color change can be performed in the effect display device 1600, the light emitter emits purple) Alternatively, the hold display mode is expressed by executing light emission in a predetermined pattern. The light emission of the predetermined pattern includes, for example, a pattern in which red flashes and a pattern in which red and green are alternately emitted.

Further, in the example of FIG. 265, a series of effects in which the character hides the hold display and evacuates is performed only once, but the effect may be performed multiple times. When the effect is executed a plurality of times, the mode of the hold display may change each time, the mode of the hold display may change at least once, or the mode of the hold display may not change even once. Good.

Moreover, it is desirable that the holding peep effect is performed only for the holding of the special map 1. When the game is being advanced mainly due to fluctuations in Toku-zu 2, for example, a very short fluctuation time is often selected such as a time saving state, so it is necessary to execute the holding peep effect at high speed. , Because it may confuse the player.

Further, there may be a plurality of types of characters in the pending look-in effect. The expectations of the plurality of characters may be different, or the expectations of some or all of the characters may be common. The expectation level may be a hold change expectation level in the hold peep effect, or may be a big hit expectation level in the pending change. Specifically, for example, the holding expectation degree becomes higher in the order of the character A, the character B, and the character C, and the character C is selected only when the holding change is executed. Further, for example, although the character B has a higher pending change expectation than the character A, the character A may have a higher jackpot expectation when the pending change occurs than the character B. Further, the character A and the character B may have the same hold change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree, and the character C may be set to have the hold change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree higher than those of the character A and the character B.

Although it is desirable that the holding peep effect is performed only when the variation during execution is out of reach, the variation during execution is a non-reach variation or a reach variation where the jackpot expectation is not high (e.g., out of normal reach). It is more desirable that the holding look-in effect is performed only in the case of (variation etc.). In other words, it is desirable that the pending look-in effect does not occur not only when the change in execution is a big hit change but also when a reach effect with a high expectation for a big hit such as SP reach is executed.

If an on-hold peep effect occurs during a change in SP reach, the player thinks that the on-hold change has a higher expectation than the currently executed change, and the SP concerned This is because expectations for reach may be weakened.

[20. Multiple cycle production]
In the following, an effect in which a plurality of cycle effects are simultaneously executed will be described. A cycle effect is a cyclic effect in which a predetermined effect is executed in one cycle and the predetermined effect in the one cycle is continuously executed a plurality of times (however, the cycle effect may end in the middle of the cycle). Is. The cycle effect may be ended in the middle of the cycle.

[20-1. Hold cycle production and decorative design cycle production]
FIG. 266 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIG. 266, the holding cycle effect repeats the effect of setting 4 frames as one cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect of setting 6 frames as one cycle. That is, one cycle in the decorative symbol cycle effect is longer than one cycle in the hold cycle effect.

The length of one frame can be defined by the number of frames in the effect display device 1600, for example. Further, the length of one frame may be different for each effect. That is, the larger the number of frames in one cycle, the longer one cycle does not necessarily mean. Specifically, for example, when one frame is 5 frames and one cycle consists of 4 frames, the length of one cycle is 20 frames, but one frame is 3 frames and one cycle is 6 frames. The length of one cycle in the case of frames is 18 frames.

However, in the following, for convenience of description, it is assumed that the length of one frame is the same in all the effects. Specifically, a predetermined number of frames (10 frames, for example) in the effect display device 1600 are called one frame. That is, in the following, it is assumed that the larger the number of frames in one cycle, the longer the time for one cycle.

In the example of FIG. 266, there is a hold display area from the lower center to the lower left of the effect display device 1600. A pedestal is displayed in the hold display area, and each hold display is displayed on the upper or lower part of the pedestal. Each pending display is, from the center to the left, the variation that is being executed, the next variation of the variation that is being executed and the variation that is being suspended (also referred to as the retention 1 variation), and the variation that is the next to the retention 1 variation and is retained. Medium fluctuations (also referred to as HOLD2 fluctuations), fluctuations that are next to HOLD2 fluctuations and are pending (also referred to as HOLD3 fluctuations), and fluctuations that are subsequent to HOLD3 fluctuations and are pending changes (HOLD4 (Also referred to as variation), indicating a hold corresponding to. In addition, in the state where the hold cycle effect is not executed, each hold display is a state where it is displayed on the pedestal as in (A) (a display slightly floating from the pedestal as in (A)). But it may be).

The hold display in each frame of the hold cycle effect is as follows. In the first frame, each hold display is displayed on the pedestal as in (B) (the same state as (A) in which the hold cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as shown in (C), each hold display is displayed below as compared with the state of the first frame. Specifically, for example, a part of each hold display overlaps the pedestal. In the third frame, the display position of each hold display returns to the same state as in the first frame, as shown in (D). In the fourth frame, as in (E), each hold display is displayed above the pedestal (at a position higher than the first frame and the third frame). When the effect of the fourth frame is completed, the effect is returned to the effect of the first frame as shown in (F).

By executing the hold cycle effect, the hold display can be prevented from completely blending into the background, so that the player can easily see the hold display, and eventually miss the hold when there is a hold. Occurrence of a situation can be suppressed.

In addition, when the hold display based on a new winning is displayed while the hold cycle effect is being executed, for example, the hold display may perform the hold cycle effect in synchronization with the hold cycle effect being executed. desirable. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the third frame of the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect in the hold display is synchronized with the hold display effects in all the hold displays by starting from the third frame. As a result, even if a new hold display is displayed during the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect that is comfortable to the player is executed.

It should be noted that, regardless of the frames of the holding cycle effect being executed, the hold display effect in the hold display corresponding to the hold display may be started from a predetermined number of frames (for example, from the first frame). As a result, there is a possibility that the hold display for which the hold cycle effect has already been executed and the hold display newly acquired during the hold cycle effect can be distinguished and visually recognized. As a result, the player can get a feeling of elation. In the example of FIG. 266, in the hold cycle effect, an effect in which the hold display moves up and down the pedestal is executed, but for example, an effect in which the hold display rotates (the coordinate values of the hold display itself are held together. (Cycle effect) or effect in which the effect of the hold display changes may be executed.

Next, the decorative pattern will be described. In the example of FIG. 266, each decorative pattern includes a number and a character (corresponding to the number) displayed behind the number. In the state where the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed, the characters in each decorative symbol are upright as in (B).

The display of the decorative design in each frame of the decorative design cycle production is as follows. In the first frame, as in (B), the characters in each decorative symbol are upright (the same state as (A) in which the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as in (C), the character in each decorative pattern punches rightward. In the third frame, as in (D), the character in each decorative pattern punches leftward. In the fourth frame, the character in each decorative pattern is kicking to the right as shown in (E). In the fifth frame, the character in each decorative pattern is kicking to the left as in (F). In the sixth frame, the character in each decorative pattern is kicking upward as in (G). When the effect of the sixth frame is completed, the effect returns to the first frame as shown in (H).

By executing the decorative design cycle effect, it is possible to avoid that the decorative design completely melts into the background, so that the player can easily see the decorative design and eventually overlook the stopped combination of the decorative design. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

Note that, in the example of FIG. 266, in the decorative symbol cycle effect, there is no change in the numbers included in each decorative symbol, but one cycle of change effects may be performed for the numbers as well. In addition, the periodic fluctuation of the decorative design is also an example of the decorative design cycle effect.

(A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. In the period from the start of the change in (A) to the time when the reach is taken, the hold cycle effect is basically executed. This is because it is easy for the player to visually recognize the hold display. Note that the hold cycle effect may not be executed during the period. If, for example, in the period, a high expectation effect using a hold display such as a hold change effect is set to a low ratio, etc., a hold cycle effect is performed to make it easy to visually confirm the hold display. This is because the player cannot be uplifted.

From (B), the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (B), the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. If the hold cycle effect is performed even in the state of (A), the start timing of the two cycle effects may be aligned at the start of the decorative symbol cycle effect. Specifically, for example, even in the case where the effect of the second frame of the holding cycle effect is being executed in the frame immediately before (B), the first frame of the holding cycle effect is started at the start of (B). You may move.

In (C), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (D), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (E), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

In (F), the hold cycle effect is returned to the first frame, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the effect of the fifth frame. In (G), the effect of the second frame of the holding cycle effect and the effect of the sixth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (H), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is returned to the first frame.

(I) is a state in which SP reach has been developed. When SP reach starts, the decorative design is displayed in a small size in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative design cycle effect ends. Further, even if SP reach starts, the holding cycle effect continues.

In the period before the SP reach is executed, the player's feelings have not increased much yet, but since there is still a high possibility that the hold change effect is executed, the hold cycle effect is executed in the period. Thus, it is possible to make the player positively notice that there is a hold. Further, in the period before the SP reach is executed, the player's attention to the decorative pattern becomes high, so that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the reach effect is executed.

Therefore, in the period before the SP reach is executed, the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol effect are executed at the same time, so that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the reach effect is executed, but the hold change. You can also focus on the production.

In addition, as described above, in the example of FIG. 266, one cycle is longer in the decorative symbol cycle effect than in the hold cycle effect. The shorter the one cycle, the easier the display looks as a still image. On the other hand, the longer the one cycle is, the easier the display appears to be a moving image, so that the display is less likely to blend into the background and the visibility is improved. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 266, in the state where the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, the decorative symbol has higher visibility than the reserved display. As a result, in the period before the execution of SP reach, although there is a possibility that a pending change effect with a high degree of expectation may be executed, a decorative pattern indicating a special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is considered to be more important. Person can be given a feeling of uplifting.

FIG. 267 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, as in the case of FIG. 266, but in the example of FIG. 267, the hold cycle effect is 6 frames 1 It is an effect that is a cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is different from FIG. 266 in that it is an effect that 4 frames are one cycle. That is, in the example of FIG. 267, one cycle in the decorative symbol cycle effect is shorter than one cycle in the hold cycle effect. In the example of FIG. 267, similarly to FIG. 266, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period before the start of SP reach.

The hold display in each frame of the hold cycle effect is as follows. In the first frame, each hold display is displayed on the pedestal as in (B) (the same state as (A) in which the hold cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as shown in (C), each hold display is displayed below as compared with the state of the first frame. Specifically, for example, a part of each hold display overlaps the pedestal. In the third frame, as shown in (D), the respective hold displays are displayed further downward as compared with the state of the second frame, and specifically, for example, all of the hold displays overlap the pedestal.

In the fourth frame, the display position of each hold display returns to the same state as in the second frame as shown in (E). In the fifth frame, as in (F), the display position of each hold display returns to the same state as in the first frame. In the sixth frame, as in (G), each hold display is displayed above the pedestal (at a position higher than the first frame and the fifth frame). When the effect of the sixth frame is completed, the effect returns to the first frame as shown in (H).

The display of the decorative design in each frame of the decorative design cycle production is as follows. In the first frame, as in (B), the characters in each decorative symbol are upright (the same state as (A) in which the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as in (C), the character in each decorative pattern punches rightward. In the third frame, as in (D), the character in each decorative pattern punches leftward. In the fourth frame, the character in each decorative pattern is kicking to the right as shown in (E). When the effect of the fourth frame is completed, the effect is returned to the effect of the first frame as shown in (F).

(A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. From (B), the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (B), the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (C), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (D), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (E), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

In (F), the effect of the fifth frame is executed as the holding cycle effect, and the effect of the decorative symbol cycle is returned to the effect of the first frame. In (G), the effect of the sixth frame of the holding cycle effect and the effect of the second frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (H), the holding cycle effect is returned to the effect of the first frame, and the effect of the third frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

(I) is a state in which SP reach has been developed. When SP reach starts, the decorative design is displayed in a small size in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative design cycle effect ends. Further, even if SP reach starts, the holding cycle effect continues.

In the example of FIG. 267, one cycle is longer in the hold cycle effect than in the decorative symbol cycle effect. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 267, in the state where the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, the hold display has higher visibility than the decorative symbol. This makes it possible to more strongly appeal to the player that the hold display is stronger than the decorative design, and therefore, if there is a hold, it is unclear whether SP pre-reach (that is, a production with a high degree of expectation will be executed). At a certain stage), it is possible to appeal to the player that a plurality of big hits may arrive in a short time.

Although not shown, when the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period before SP reach, even if the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same. Good (specifically, for example, both one cycle of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). Since the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same, both the hold display and the decorative symbol can be noticed.

The length of the period before SP reach in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed ((A) to (H) in FIG. 266, and (A) to (H) in FIG. 267) It is desirable that the length of the period) be longer than one cycle of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect, whichever variation pattern of the plurality of variation patterns that causes SP reach. As a result, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in a plurality of cycles, so that the player can recognize that the effect is cyclical, and thus the attention to the reserved display and the decorative symbol can be increased. ..

In addition, the length of the period before SP reach in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is at least the least common multiple of the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect. Is desirable. That is, in the example of FIGS. 266 and 267, the period is preferably 12 frames or more. After the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are started, the start timing of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is aligned again at the timing of the least common multiple. Therefore, since the length of the period is equal to or greater than the least common multiple, it is possible to realize one cycle effect in which the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are integrated (the length of one cycle is the least common multiple). Therefore, it is possible to further attract the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative pattern.

Further, the length of the period before SP reach in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed may be less than or equal to one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect.

268 and FIG. 269 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIG. 268 and FIG. 269, the hold cycle effect repeats the effect with 4 frames as one cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect with 6 frames as one cycle. The effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the examples of FIGS. 268 and 269 is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266. Is omitted. The examples of FIGS. 268 and 269 differ from FIG. 266 in that the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed at the same time during the execution of the SP reach.

(A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. (C) is a continuous state in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. It is assumed that only the hold cycle effect is executed until immediately before (D).

(D) is a state in which SP reach has started. It is assumed that SP reach continues until (K) described later. In (D), the effect of the first frame of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (E), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (F), the third cycle effect of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (G), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

In (H), the hold cycle effect is returned to the effect of the first frame, and the effect of the fifth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. In (I), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the effect of the sixth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is returned to the effect of the first frame.

In this example, the title display indicating SP reach (the display of “Janken game!” in (D) of FIG. 268, etc.) has a display time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect, and is a decoration. Although the display time is shorter than one cycle of the symbol cycle effect, the title display indicating the SP reach may be a display time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect, or the start of two cycles. The display time may be longer than the period (12 frames in this example) until they are aligned again.

(K) is the final frame of the SP reach effect, and the judge effect in the SP reach effect (the effect that directly indicates the special lottery result in the variation) is performed. When the teammate character wins the enemy character in the rock-paper-scissors game, it is determined that the variation is a jackpot variation. What is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is the hand of the ally character, and what is displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. In (K), the ally character has won. The decorative symbol cycle effect is executed until (K). (L) is a state in which the judge is in production. In (L), the decorative symbol cycle effect is finished, but the hold cycle effect is being executed. (M) is in the stage of judging, and is the next frame after (L). In (M), the hold cycle effect continues.

Although the decorative symbol cycle effect is terminated in (L) and (M), the decorative symbol cycle effect may be continuously executed in (L) and (M). In that case, in (M), it is preferable to display the hit symbol "4" as a medium symbol in a large size in the center of the screen. By doing so, the degree of recognition of the reach symbol by "4" which is displayed large in the center of the screen and the execution of the decorative symbol cycle effect is increased, and the player can clearly recognize that the jackpot has been hit. ..

During the period during execution of SP reach, the player's sense of tension is considerably increased. Therefore, by executing the hold cycle effect during the period, it becomes easier to recognize that a new fluctuation is held, and therefore, even if the SP reach result is off, there is an expectation for a new hold. By doing so, it is possible to relieve excessive tension. Further, during the period during which SP reach is being executed, the decorative symbol is displayed in a small manner on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect during the period, the decorative symbol is in the reach state. It is possible to make the player recognize again.

Therefore, while the SP reach is being executed, both the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol effect are executed at the same time, so that the player can clearly recognize that the reach effect is being executed, but the excessive tension is alleviated. Can be made.

Further, as described above, in the examples of FIGS. 268 and 269, the decorative symbol cycle effect has one cycle longer than the holding cycle effect. Therefore, during the SP reach production, the decorative pattern is more strongly appealing to the player than the hold display, so that the player is more likely to be in the reach production (a big hit may come soon). You can make a strong appeal.

Although not shown, when the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed during the SP reach execution, one cycle is longer in the hold cycle effect than in the decorative symbol cycle effect. It may be (specifically, for example, 1 cycle of the holding cycle effect is 6 frames, and 1 cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). In this case, during SP reach, because the hold display has higher visibility than the decorative pattern, it is possible to appeal to the player that there is a possibility that multiple big hits may arrive in a short time due to the hold. You can Further, since the suspended display is more likely to be noticed than the decorative pattern, the player's excessive tension can be further alleviated.

Also, although not shown, in the period during execution of SP reach, if the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect and the hold cycle effect is the same. There may be (specifically, for example, both one cycle of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is four frames). In this case, since the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same, both the hold display and the decorative symbol can be noticed.

In addition, the length of the period during SP reach in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is preferably longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect. As a result, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in a plurality of cycles, so that the player can recognize that the effect is cyclical, and thus the attention to the reserved display and the decorative symbol can be increased. ..

In addition, the length of the period during SP reach in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is at least the least common multiple of the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect. Is desirable. That is, in the examples of FIGS. 268 and 269, the period is preferably 12 frames or more. After the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are started, the start timing of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is aligned again at the timing of the least common multiple. Therefore, since the length of the period is equal to or greater than the least common multiple, it is possible to realize one cycle effect in which the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are integrated (the length of one cycle is the least common multiple). Therefore, it is possible to further attract the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative pattern.

It should be noted that when the judge effect of FIG. 269(K) is shown (timing at which the winning result is shown), the hold cycle effect may not be executed, or the hold display itself may not be performed.

270 and 271 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the examples of FIGS. 270 and 271, the hold cycle effect repeats the effect of setting 4 frames as one cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect of setting 6 frames as one cycle. Since the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the examples of FIGS. 270 and 271 is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266, respectively, description will be made. Is omitted. The examples of FIGS. 270 and 271 differ from FIG. 266 in that the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period after the judge effect in the SP reach.

(A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. (C) is a state in which SP reach has started. (D) is a continuation state of the SP reach production. (E) is a state in which the judge effect in SP reach is being executed. In (E), the teammate character has lost the enemy character. (F) is a continuation of (E), and is a state in which the judge effect is being executed.

(G) is the state after the end of the judge effect in SP reach. When the judge effect is finished, the decorative design is again displayed in a large size in the center of the effect display device 1600 (in other words, the decorative effect is displayed until the decorative pattern is again displayed in a large size). It is assumed that only the hold cycle effect is being executed until immediately before (G), and the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed from (G).

In (G), the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (H), the effect of the second frame of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (I), the third cycle effect of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J), the effect of the fourth frame of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. Note that in (J) in the example of FIG. 271, the hold display moved above the pedestal overlaps with another effect image (the character “sorry...”), and the hold display is preferentially displayed ( In the example of FIG. 271, the characters are displayed in front of the characters in other effects), but other effect images may be preferentially displayed.

In (K), the hold cycle effect is returned to the effect of the first frame, and the effect of the fifth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. In (L), the effect of the second frame of the holding cycle effect is executed, and the effect of the sixth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (M), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is returned to the effect of the first frame. The decorative symbol cycle effect is continued until, for example, the decorative symbol is completely stopped at the end of the fluctuation. In addition, the hold cycle effect may be ended together with the complete stop of the decorative pattern at the end of the change, or may be continued after the end of the change, for example.

In the period after the end of the judge effect, if the jackpot is not announced in the judge effect, the player is in the state of being hit by the reality, and by executing the hold cycle effect in the period, there is a hold. By making them aware, the player's feelings can be reset. Even if a big hit is announced in the judge effect, by executing the hold cycle effect in the period concerned, the player can be made aware that there is a hold, so that the player can expect more big hits after the big hit ends. Can be held by

Further, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect in the period, the decorative symbol indicating the special lottery result after the judge effect can be more strongly appealed to the player. Therefore, in the period after the judge effect, both the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol effect are executed at the same time, so that the special lottery result can be clearly recognized by the player, but if the result is off, the player's It is possible to reduce discouragement and provide a player with a higher sense of expectation when a big hit occurs.

Further, as described above, in the examples of FIGS. 270 and 271, one cycle is longer in the decorative symbol cycle effect than in the hold cycle effect. Therefore, after the judge effect, the decorative design will be more strongly appealing to the player than the hold display. In particular, if the special lottery result is out of order, by strongly appealing the decorative design rather than the hold display, the player can be sure to recognize that the result is out of order, and the player and the hall It is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble between the two. It should be noted that, so that the decorative pattern cycle effect can be grasped on the side of the hall, for example, the execution time of the decorative symbol cycle effect is secured to such an extent that the decorative camera cycle effect after the judge effect can be photographed by the surveillance camera in the hall. desirable. Specifically, for example, it is a time longer than the fluctuation pattern which is the shortest fluctuation time throughout all the gaming states.

Although not shown, when the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period after the judge effect, one cycle of the holding cycle effect is longer than that of the decorative symbol cycle effect. It is good (specifically, for example, 1 cycle of the holding cycle effect is 6 frames, and 1 cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). In this case, in the period after the judge effect, the player pays more attention to the held display than the decorative design, so that the player's dislike can be reduced when the special lottery result is out of alignment.

Although not shown, when the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period after the judge effect, the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect and the holding cycle effect is the same. It may be (specifically, for example, one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are both 4 frames). In this case, since the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same, both the hold display and the decorative symbol can be noticed.

It should be noted that the length of the period after the judge effect in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is preferably longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect. As a result, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in a plurality of cycles, so that the player can recognize that the effect is cyclical, and thus the attention to the reserved display and the decorative symbol can be increased. ..

Note that, for example, when the left decorative design is in a swinging fluctuation state, only one decorative design is displayed as the left decorative design and is not changed to the other decorative design (for example, only "1" as the left decorative design). Is displayed and does not change to other decorative patterns), the decorative pattern is not completely stopped and is displayed in a swaying manner.

As a period in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, a period before SP reach (also referred to as a first period), a period during SP reach (also referred to as a second period), and a period after a judge effect Although the example (also referred to as the third period) has been described, it is desirable that the periods are long in the order of, for example, the first period≧the second period≧the third period.

As described above, during the first period, since the player's feelings have not yet risen, by paying the player's attention to the hold display (especially hold change effect with high expectation) and the decorative pattern, Longer periods are desirable to increase the player's expectations. The second period is a state in which a high-representation effect called SP reach is being executed, and by paying the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative pattern, it is possible to relieve the player's excessive tension. , The period shorter than the first period is desirable so as not to drastically reduce attention to SP reach. Since the third period is after the special lottery result has been directly notified, there is the above-mentioned effect to draw the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative pattern, but the player can be changed to the big hit game or the fluctuation after the next time. Therefore, it is preferable that the period is shorter than the first period and the second period.

In the example described above, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in any of the first period, the second period, and the third period. However, the first period, the second period The hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect may be simultaneously executed in the period and two or all of the third periods. Note that, in the fluctuation, even if the first period is present, the transition to the second period and the third period is not always performed after the end of the first period, but when the transition to the second period is performed after the end of the first period. May always shift to the third period after the end of the second period.

It is desirable that the display size of the decorative design in the first period and the third period is larger than the display size of the decorative design in the second period. Although the production with high expectations is not performed in the first period and the third period, since SP reach with high expectations is performed in the second period, even if the decorative symbol cycle production is performed, This is to pay attention to the player not only to the decorative pattern but also to the SP reach.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 270 and 271, the display size of the decorative symbols is the same in the first period and the third period, but the expectation is higher than in the third period in which the special lottery result has already been notified. There is a high possibility that no occurrence has occurred, and it is desirable that the decorative pattern in the first period, which may occur in the future, has a larger display size.

272 and 273 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIG. 272 and FIG. 273, the hold change effect is executed, the hold cycle effect of the normal hold (holding that has not changed) is repeated with four frames as one cycle, and the hold cycle effect after the change is , 6 frames per cycle are repeated. That is, when the hold changes, one cycle in the hold cycle effect becomes longer. In the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect with 6 frames as one cycle.

In the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect of the normal hold is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266, and each of the hold cycle effects of the changed hold cycle. Since the effect of the frame is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 267, the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, since the effect of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect in the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273 is the same as the effect of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266, description thereof will be omitted.

In the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period before the execution of the SP reach (first period).

(A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. In (A), a star-shaped image indicating a pending change is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600. (B) is a state where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. In (B) to (E), the star-shaped image is gradually approaching the reserved display area. From (B), the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In (B), the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (C), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (D), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (E), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

In (F), the star-shaped image collides with the hold corresponding to the fluctuation, and the hold corresponding to the fluctuation is changed to the star-shaped hold. Further, in (F), the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect of the unchanged hold and the changed hold and the effect of the fifth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed.

In the example of FIG. 272, the hold change effect is completed at the start of the first frame of the hold cycle effect, but the hold change effect may be completed in any of the hold cycle effects. For example, when the hold change effect is completed at the start of the Nth frame (not the first frame) of the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect of the changed hold is changed from the Nth frame at the same time when the hold change effect is completed. It may start, or may start from the first frame. In addition, when the hold change effect is completed at the start of the Nth frame of the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect after the change is changed to the 1st time when the hold cycle effect before the change is returned to 1 time. You may start from.

In (G), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect of the unchanged hold and the changed hold and the effect of the sixth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (H), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect of the unchanged hold and the changed hold is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect returns to the effect of the first frame. Since the content of the effect (length of one cycle) is different between the hold cycle effect of hold that has not changed and the hold cycle effect of hold after the change, after (H) It becomes clear that the movement is different when holding. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold after the change with a high expectation.

In (I), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect of the unchanged hold and the changed hold, and the effect of the second frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (J), the hold cycle effect of the hold that has not changed is returned to the first frame, and the effect of the fifth frame of the hold cycle effect of the changed hold and the effect of the third frame of the decorative pattern cycle effect are It is running.

In (K), the hold cycle effect of the hold that has not changed is the second effect, the sixth hold effect of the hold cycle effect of the changed hold, and the third effect of the decorative pattern cycle effect. Is running. In (L), the hold cycle effect of the changed hold returns to the first frame, and the hold cycle effect of the hold that has not changed is the third effect and the fourth effect of the decorative pattern cycle effect. It is running.

In the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the pending hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in the first period, but the pending hold after the change is performed in the second period and the third period. Cycle effect decorative design cycle effect may be executed. Further, in the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the length of one cycle is the same in the holding cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect, but may be different. Hereinafter, for each pattern of a period during which the holding cycle effect of the changed hold and the decorative symbol cycle effect are performed, and the relationship between the holding cycle effect of the changed after-change and the length of one cycle in the decorative symbol cycle effect, explain.

(1) In the case where the length of one cycle (also referred to as a cycle before change) of the hold cycle effect before the change is shorter than the length of one cycle (also referred to as a cycle after the change) of the hold cycle effect after the change (Example of FIGS. 272 and 273).

Since the post-change cycle is longer than the pre-change cycle as in the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the visibility of the post-change hold is higher than that of the pre-change hold, and the post-change hold is highly expected. On the other hand, it can attract attention.

(1-1) In the first period, the case where the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed at the same time.

The first period is a period before the SP reach is executed, and is a period in which it is difficult to execute an effect with high expectation. In addition, the hold change effect is an effect with high expectation among effects that can be executed in the first period. Since the post-change cycle is longer than the pre-change cycle, by executing the hold cycle effect of the post-change hold cycle in the first period, it is possible to attract attention to the post-change hold as compared with the pre-change cycle. It is possible to fuel the player's expectation even in the first period in which the production with high expectations is difficult to be executed.

On the other hand, depending on the type of hold display after the change, the hold change effect may not have a high expectation (for example, a blue hold display), and since the selection rate of these hold with a low expectation is not low, By executing the decorative symbol cycle effect at the same time as the hold cycle effect in the first period to draw attention to the decorative symbol, the player is not given an excessive expectation.

In the first period, if the length of the changed cycle is longer than the length of one cycle of the decorative design cycle effect (also referred to as decorative design cycle), attract attention to the post-change hold as compared with the decorative design. It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation. This is particularly effective when the expectation of the pending change effect is set to be high.

In the first period, when the length of the changed cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract more attention to the decorative pattern as compared with the hold after the change, and an excessive expectation of the player. The effect of suppressing is strongly obtained. This is especially effective when the expectation of the pending change effect is set low. Moreover, since the length of the cycle before change is shorter than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle. As a result, it is possible to attract more attention to the decorative pattern even when compared with the pre-change hold, so that the player's excessiveness in the change can be expected while keeping the expectation for the change in progress rather than the change after the next time. It suppresses expectations.

In the first period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be longer than the length of the cycle before change and shorter than the length of the cycle after change. In the state before the hold change, there is a possibility that the hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative pattern cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the changed cycle being longer than the decorative pattern cycle is as described above.

Further, if the post-change cycle is longer than the first period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the first period. Therefore, if the hold cycle effect continues after the end of the first period, the one cycle It is possible to attract the player's attention to the changed hold until the end. For example, even if the production with high expectations is not performed immediately after the end of the first period, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation by attracting attention to the changed hold.

On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the first period, the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect is a periodic effect because a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the first period, and after the change, It is possible to draw more attention to the suspension of. Since it is unlikely that an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the hold change effect is executed in the first period, it is possible to maintain the expectation in the first period by drawing attention to the hold cycle effect. Further, in this case, since the cycle before change is shorter than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also shorter than the first period. Therefore, by performing the pre-change cycle a plurality of times in the first period, the visibility of the hold is improved, and the presence of the hold can be strongly appealed to the player.

(1-2) In the second period, the case where the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed.

The second period is a period in which the SP reach with high expectations is being executed. When the hold change effect is executed during the SP reach, there is a high possibility that the hold display has a high expectation (for example, a red hold display or a specially shaped hold display). Since the post-change cycle is longer than the pre-change cycle, the hold cycle effect after the change is executed in the second period, which attracts attention not only to the SP reach in the second period but also to the post-change hold. Therefore, in the second period, the player's expectation can be synergistically fueled.

On the other hand, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect at the same time as the hold cycle effect in the second period, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative symbol, and it is possible for the player to firmly recognize that the reach state is reached.

In the second period, when the length of the cycle after change is longer than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the hold after the change as compared with the decorative pattern, and to give a strong expectation to the player. You can This is particularly effective when the expectation of the pending change effect is set to be high.

In the second period, when the length of the cycle after change is shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative pattern as compared with the hold after the change, and the player is in the reach state. The effect of suppressing the excessive expectation of the player due to the pending change effect can be strongly obtained while recognizing. This is especially effective when the expectation of the pending display after the change is low. Moreover, since the length of the cycle before change is shorter than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle. This makes it possible to attract more attention to the decorative pattern even when compared with the hold before the change, so that the player is in the reach state while having an expectation for the change in execution rather than the change after the next time. Make them aware.

In the second period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be longer than the length of the cycle before change and shorter than the length of the cycle after change. In the state before the hold change, there is a possibility that the hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative pattern cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the changed cycle being longer than the decorative pattern cycle is as described above.

Further, if the changed cycle is longer than the second period, one cycle of the changed cycle is not completed in the second period. Further, after the second period ends, the third period starts. Therefore, also in the third period after the end of the second period, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changed hold. For example, even if a result indicating a deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player pays attention to the hold after the change with a high expectation, so that the revival effect (the result indicating the deviation in the judge effect is notified. It is possible to expect the occurrence of an effect that is executed after the hit, and in which the result indicating the big hit is informed.

On the other hand, when the after-change cycle is shorter than the second period, the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect is a periodic effect because a plurality of after-change cycles are executed in the second period, and the after-change cycle is changed. It is possible to draw more attention to the suspension of. In particular, when the hold display is changed to have a higher expectation (than the occurrence of SP reach), the expectation in the second period can be enhanced by drawing attention to the hold cycle effect. Further, in this case, since the cycle before change is shorter than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also shorter than the second period. Therefore, by executing the pre-change cycle a plurality of times in the second period, it is possible to appeal that there is a subsequent hold even if there is a deviation, and it is possible to relieve the player's excessive tension. it can.

(1-3) In the third period, about the case where the holding cycle effect of the changed hold and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed at the same time.

The third period is the period after the judge performance. If the hold cycle effect of the changed hold is executed in the third period, and if a deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player is made a revival effect by paying attention to the changed hold with a high expectation. Can be expected to occur. In addition, by paying attention to the changed hold display after the judge effect, the player can learn which hold display the big hit or the big hit is.

On the other hand, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect at the same time as the hold cycle effect in the third period, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative symbol and make the player firmly recognize the special lottery result. In addition, even if it is a hold display with a particularly high degree of expectation, if it is out of the way, I feel discouraged with respect to the hold display, so I reduce the discouragement by attracting attention to the decorative pattern. You can

In the third period, if the length of the changed cycle is longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle, it is possible to draw attention to the hold after the change as compared with the decorative symbol after the judge effect. Since the special lottery results have already been announced by the judge's production, many players are more interested in which pending display has hit or missed rather than checking the special lottery results again. Can be improved.

In the third period, when the length of the cycle after change is shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern as compared with the hold after the change. In the third period, the decorative symbol indicates the finalized special lottery result after the judge effect (except when the revival effect is executed), so that the effect of recognizing the special lottery result becomes stronger. Further, particularly when a big hit is reported, the player's uplifting feeling can be improved by strongly appealing the decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits. Moreover, since the length of the cycle before change is shorter than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle. This makes it possible to draw more attention to the decorative pattern even when compared with the hold before the change, so that the player can be given the special lottery result while expecting the change during the execution more than the change after the next time. I'm making you firmly recognize.

In the third period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be longer than the length of the cycle before change and shorter than the length of the cycle after change. In the state before the hold change, there is a possibility that the hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative pattern cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the changed cycle being longer than the decorative pattern cycle is as described above.

If the changed cycle is longer than the third period, one cycle of the changed cycle is not completed in the third period. Therefore, especially in the case of the judge production, the player is disappointed with the hold after the change, but when the shift is notified, the change ends without ending the cycle after the change, and thus the attention is excessively drawn. This can prevent the player from being discouraged.

On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the third period, a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the third period, so the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect is a periodic effect, and after the change, It is possible to draw more attention to the suspension of. Therefore, when the deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player can expect the occurrence of the revival effect by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. In addition, by paying attention to the changed hold display after the judge effect, the player can learn which hold display the big hit or the big hit is. Further, in this case, since the cycle before change is shorter than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also shorter than the third period. Therefore, when the deviation is notified in the judge production by performing the plurality of cycles before change in the third period, the effect of providing the player with a sense of security due to the suspension even after the change When a big hit is informed by a judge effect, it is possible to give an expectation for a further big hit in the fluctuation after the big hit game.

(2) When the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change.

Unlike the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the length of the pre-change cycle may be shorter than the length of the post-change cycle. Since the post-change cycle is shorter than the pre-change cycle, the visibility of the pre-change hold is higher than that of the post-change hold, and the player's excessive expectation for the post-change hold is suppressed, and the fluctuation Since there is a hold also after, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security.

(2-1) In the first period, the case where the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed.

In the first period, if the length of the cycle after change is longer than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the hold after the change as compared with the decorative pattern, and give the player a strong sense of expectation. be able to. Moreover, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the decorative pattern cycle. Therefore, the effect of providing the player with a sense of security can be greatly obtained by the holding even after the change.

In the first period, when the length of the cycle after change is shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative pattern as compared with the hold after the change, and an excessive expectation of the player. A strong suppressing effect is obtained. This is especially effective when the expectation of the pending change effect is set low.

In the first period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be shorter than the length of the cycle before change and longer than the length of the cycle after change. In the first period, the decorative design does not directly indicate the result of the special lottery, and in the state before the hold change, the hold change effect is likely to be executed, so pay attention to the hold before the change rather than the decorative design. By attracting, you can fuel the expectations of the player. The effect of the shorter cycle after the change than the decorative pattern cycle is as described above.

Further, if the post-change cycle is longer than the first period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the first period. Therefore, if the hold cycle effect continues after the end of the first period, the one cycle Until the end, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. For example, even if the production with high expectations is not performed immediately after the end of the first period, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation by attracting attention to the changed hold. Further, in this case, since the cycle after change is shorter than the cycle before change, the cycle before change is also longer than the first period. Therefore, since the pre-change cycle does not end in the first period, if the hold cycle effect continues even after the end of the first period, the player is provided with a sense of security due to the hold until the end of the first cycle. can do.

On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the first period, the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect is a periodic effect because a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the first period, and after the change, It is possible to draw more attention to the suspension of. Since it is unlikely that an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the hold change effect is executed in the first period, it is possible to maintain the expectation in the first period by drawing attention to the hold cycle effect.

(2-2) In the second period, about the case where the hold cycle effect of the changed hold and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed.

In the second period, when the length of the cycle after change is longer than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the hold after the change as compared with the decorative pattern, and to give a strong expectation to the player. You can This is particularly effective when the expectation of the pending change effect is set to be high. Moreover, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the decorative pattern cycle. Therefore, the effect of providing the player with a sense of security due to the suspension even after the fluctuation is greatly obtained.

In the second period, when the length of the cycle after change is shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative pattern as compared with the hold after the change, and the player is in the reach state. The effect of suppressing the excessive expectation of the player due to the pending change effect can be strongly obtained while recognizing. This is especially effective when the expectation of the pending display after the change is low.

In the second period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be shorter than the length of the cycle before change and longer than the length of the cycle after change. In the second period, since SP reach with high expectation is being executed, it is possible to suppress excessive expectations of the player for the reach state by attracting attention to the hold before the change, rather than the decorative pattern in the reach state. However, it is possible to provide a sense of security that there is a change from the next time on hold. The effect of the shorter cycle after the change than the decorative pattern cycle is as described above.

Further, if the changed cycle is longer than the second period, one cycle of the changed cycle is not completed in the second period. Further, after the second period ends, the third period starts. Therefore, also in the third period after the end of the second period, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changed hold. For example, even if a result indicating a deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player pays attention to the hold after the change with a high expectation, so that the revival effect (the result indicating the deviation in the judge effect is notified. It is possible to expect the occurrence of an effect that is executed after the hit, and in which the result indicating the big hit is informed. Further, in this case, since the cycle before change is longer than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also longer than the second period. Therefore, since one cycle of the pre-change cycle is not completed in the second period, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the post-change suspension even in the third period after the end of the second period, and the next and subsequent suspensions. It is possible to provide a sense of security due to fluctuations.

On the other hand, when the after-change cycle is shorter than the second period, the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect is a periodic effect because a plurality of after-change cycles are executed in the second period, and the after-change cycle is changed. It is possible to draw more attention to the suspension of. In particular, when the hold display is changed to have a higher expectation (than the occurrence of SP reach), the expectation in the second period can be enhanced by drawing attention to the hold cycle effect.

(2-3) In the third period, about the case where the hold cycle effect of the changed hold and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed.

In the third period, if the length of the changed cycle is longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle, it is possible to draw attention to the hold after the change as compared with the decorative symbol after the judge effect. Since the special lottery results have already been announced by the judge's production, many players are more interested in which pending display has hit or missed rather than checking the special lottery results again. Can be improved. Moreover, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the decorative pattern cycle. Therefore, when the deviation is informed in the judge effect, a large effect of providing a sense of security to the player due to the suspension even after the fluctuation is obtained, and when the big hit is informed in the judge effect, It is possible to give a sense of expectation for a further big hit in the fluctuation after the big hit game.

In the third period, when the length of the cycle after change is shorter than the length of the decorative pattern cycle, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern as compared with the hold after the change. In the third period, the decorative symbol indicates the finalized special lottery result after the judge effect (except when the revival effect is executed), so that the effect of recognizing the special lottery result becomes stronger. Further, particularly when a big hit is reported, the player's uplifting feeling can be improved by strongly appealing the decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits.

In the third period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be shorter than the length of the cycle before change and longer than the length of the cycle after change. In the state before the hold change, there is a possibility that the hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative pattern cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the shorter cycle after the change than the decorative pattern cycle is as described above.

If the changed cycle is longer than the third period, one cycle of the changed cycle is not completed in the third period. Therefore, particularly in the case of the judge effect, the player is discouraged from the hold after the change when the deviation is notified, but the change ends without the end of the post-change cycle, so attention should be paid excessively. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged without attracting him. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the third period. Therefore, since one cycle of the pre-change cycle does not end in the third period, it is possible to suppress an excessive attention to the pending indicating the next change, and make the player firmly recognize the special lottery result in the change being executed. be able to.

On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the third period, a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the third period, so the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect is a periodic effect, and after the change, It is possible to draw more attention to the suspension of. Therefore, when the deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player can expect the occurrence of the revival effect by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. In addition, by paying attention to the changed hold display after the judge effect, the player can learn which hold display the big hit or the big hit is.

(3) When the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change.

Unlike the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the length of the pre-change cycle and the length of the post-change cycle may be the same. Since the length of the pre-change cycle and the length of the post-change cycle are the same, the visibility of the post-change hold and the pre-change hold is about the same, and there is a sense of security and the hold change due to the hold. It is possible to provide the player with a good sense of expectation by the production in a well-balanced manner. Further, in particular, for example, in the case where the hold display before the change and the hold after the change have the same movement of the hold display in the hold cycle effect, for example, the hold before the change and the hold after the change in the hold cycle effect The timing of the hold change may be determined so that the movements of the hold display are synchronized. By synchronizing the movements of the hold display before and after the change, the visibility of the hold display as a whole is improved, and for example, the player can easily count the number of hold.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, in any of the first period, the second period, and the third period, the decorative pattern includes numbers and characters, but, for example, the second period and the third period (that is, the decorative pattern). In a period in which the display size is smaller than the first period, a period in which a production with high expectations is being executed, or a period after informing the player of the special lottery result), the decorative pattern is a number (that is, It may be expressed only by the minimum necessary information for the player to grasp the special lottery result). In this case, the decorative symbol cycle effect in the second period and the third period is realized by the movement of numbers.

Further, there may be a plurality of types of holding cycle effects having different display modes. Specifically, for example, there may be a plurality of types of hold cycle effects having different one cycle lengths, or a plurality of hold display modes for at least one frame having the same one cycle length. There may be different types of hold cycle effects.

Further, with respect to the plurality of types of holding cycle effects, the appearance rate and the jackpot expectation degree and the appearance rate in the variation may be different. For example, the longer the length of one cycle, the higher the expectations may be, and the shorter the length of one cycle, the higher the expectations may be. In addition, for example, even if the length of one cycle is the same, the holding cycle effect in which the holding display includes effects and the holding cycle effect in which the movement amount of the holding display is large is expected as compared with other holding cycle effects. The degree may be set high.

Further, for example, the appearance rate is set to be lower as the holding cycle effect having a higher expectation. It should be noted that, for the hold cycle effect in the hold after the change in hold, it is desirable to show the degree of expectation of the change corresponding to the hold after the change. It should be noted that the decorative symbol cycle effect may have a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and the display mode, the degree of expectation, and the appearance rate are the same as those in the hold cycle effect.

Further, depending on the effect stage, hold cycle effects having different lengths of one cycle may be executed. For example, one or a plurality of effect stages in which a holding cycle effect having a long one cycle (for example, 8 frames) is executed, and a holding cycle effect having a normal one cycle length (for example, 6 frames) is executed 1 Alternatively, it is assumed that there are a plurality of effect stages and one or a plurality of effect stages in which a holding cycle effect having a short one cycle length (for example, 4 frames) is executed.

When shifting to a rendering stage in which the length of one cycle in the holding cycle rendering becomes long, the rendering stage after the shifting tends to attract attention to the holding display more than the rendering stage before the shifting. Therefore, for example, when the holding change effect is set to be more easily executed as the effect stage has a longer one cycle in the hold cycle effect (the effect stage having a longer one cycle in the hold cycle effect is more suitable for the jackpot). When the expectation is high), it becomes easier to attract attention to the hold change effect, and the player's expectation can be improved.

On the other hand, when shifting to a production stage in which the length of one cycle in the suspension cycle production is shortened, the production stage before the transition is more likely to attract attention to the suspension display than the production stage after the transition. .. Therefore, for example, when the effect stage outside the reserved display area of the effect display device 1600 is set to be executed more easily in the effect stage where the length of one cycle in the reserved cycle effect is shorter, the reserved display is performed in the stage after the transition. In contrast to the stage before the transition, the attention to the hold display is lowered and the attention to the effect outside the hold display area is increased.

Further, although the production stage before the transition is more likely to attract attention to the hold display, the production stage in which the length of one cycle in the hold cycle production is shorter may be expected to be larger than the big hit. In this case, the player is paying attention to the effect stage before the transition, and thus can be surprised when a big hit occurs in the effect stage having a short one cycle.

In addition, a transition between effect stages in which hold cycle effects having the same length of one cycle are executed may be performed. If a transition to a production stage with a different length of one cycle is performed frequently, the attention level of the player with respect to the hold display changes each time, and some players feel calmly unable to play the game. A transition between performance stages having the same length of one cycle is executed.

A law may be provided for such a transition of the stage. As the law, for example, "a production stage with a long one cycle→a production stage with a short one cycle→a production stage with the same one cycle length→a production stage with a long one cycle..." or "a production stage with a high degree of expectation→ There is a production stage in which the hold cycle is shortened or a production stage in which the hold cycle is lengthened." In addition, for example, there is a law such that when a deviation is notified in a predetermined effect in a predetermined effect stage, the next effect changes to a normal effect stage.

Note that the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect may be different depending on the game state. For example, the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect may be different for each of the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state. However, it is desirable that the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect in each gaming state is shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the gaming state. That is, when the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the time saving game state is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal gaming state, the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect in the normal gaming state is the time saving game. It becomes longer than the length of one cycle of the state holding cycle effect.

Assuming that the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the gaming state, if the fluctuation pattern of the shortest fluctuation time is selected, in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. This is because it is not possible to execute one cycle of the hold cycle effect with one change, and it is difficult to attract the player's attention to the hold display.

[20-2. Hold cycle effect and status display cycle effect]
274 and 275 are illustrations showing an example of an effect in which the hold cycle effect and the state display cycle effect are simultaneously executed. The state display cycle effect may be executed over a plurality of changes in a specific zone (a high-expectation effect zone and may be displayed at a predetermined timing within one change). The display indicating that the user is staying in (good) is an effect that changes periodically. In the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, the user stays in the above-mentioned super pine zone as the specific zone.

In the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, the hold change effect is executed, and the normal hold (unchanged hold) hold cycle effect repeats the effect with four frames as one cycle, and the changed hold (red hold). The holding cycle effect of () repeats the effect with 6 frames as one cycle.

In the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, the effect of each frame of the normal hold cycle effect is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266. Since the effect of the frame is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 267, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the state display cycle effect, a band indicating that the user stays in the super pine zone (“in the super pine zone... ”) is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. In the state display cycle presentation, the characters "while staying in the super pine zone..." move one character to the left in the band for each frame, and the character that reaches the left end of the band is displayed in the next frame. Reappearing from the right end realizes a periodic display.

By executing the state display cycle effect, it is possible to avoid that the state display completely blends into the background, so that it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that he is staying in a specific zone with high expectations. Can properly recognize that you are staying in a specific zone, and the player's expectation will be improved.

In addition, by performing the state display cycle effect and the hold cycle effect after the change after the change at the same time, a status display indicating that the user stays in a specific zone with high expectation and a hold display after the change, Since it is possible to draw attention to both, the two effects synergistically improve the player's expectation. Therefore, when the expectation of the post-change hold is low (for example, blue hold), the hold cycle effect of the post-change hold is not executed in order to maintain the player's expectation of staying in the specific zone. May be.

In addition, by performing the state display cycle effect and the hold cycle effect of the hold before the change at the same time, the status display indicating that the user stays in the specific zone with high expectation and the hold display before the change, Since it is possible to attract attention to both sides, the player feels a sense of expectation by staying in a specific zone, and the sense of security that the fluctuations will be suspended after the next time even if they are deviated in the specific zone. Can be provided to.

In addition, the state display cycle effect is repeated with 9 frames as one cycle. That is, the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the cycle before change and the cycle after change. The expectation in the state of staying in the specific zone is higher than that in the state in which the hold after most changes is selected (specifically, for example, when the hold change effect is executed, stay in the specific zone). If the hold change effect with higher expectations is selected (10% or less), if one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the after-change cycle, It is possible to attract more attention to the status display than the hold display, and to improve the player's expectation.

Further, as described above, the expectation level when staying in the specific zone is very high, so that the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the length of one cycle in the hold cycle effect before the change. As a result, it is possible to provide a sense of satisfaction to a player who is more entertained by focusing on the state display and improving the expectation, rather than focusing on the pending display before the change to obtain a sense of security.

In the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, the hold cycle effect and the state display cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period before the execution of the SP reach (first period). In the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, since all the decorative symbols are changing, the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed, but a part or all of the decorative symbols are stopped (the position of the decorative symbol does not change). In the (state), the decorative symbol cycle effect may be executed simultaneously with the state display cycle effect.

(A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. In (A), the hold display corresponding to the successive changes has changed to red hold. Further, in (A), the hold cycle effect in the hold before the change and the hold after the change and the state display cycle effect are started. In addition, the period of (A)-(I) is a period when all the decorative symbols are changing in the said change. In (A), the hold cycle effect before the change, the hold cycle effect after the change, and the effect of the first frame of the state display cycle effect are executed. The effect of the first frame of the state display cycle effect is a state in which the first character of the character in the band is displayed at the right end portion in the band as shown in (A).

In (B), the hold cycle effect of the hold before the change, the hold cycle effect of the change after the change, and the effect of the second frame of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (C), the effect of the hold cycle before the change, the effect of the hold cycle after the change, and the effect of the third frame of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (D), the effect of the 4th frame of the hold cycle effect of the hold before the change, the hold cycle effect of the hold after the change, and the state display cycle effect is executed.

In (E), the hold cycle effect of the hold before the change is returned to the first frame, and the hold cycle effect of the hold after the change and the effect of the fifth frame of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (F), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect before the change is executed, and the effect of the hold cycle after the change and the sixth frame of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (G), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the hold cycle effect of the changed hold is returned to the first frame, and the effect of the seventh frame of the state display cycle effect is executed. Has been done.

In (H), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect after the change is executed, and the effect of the eighth frame of the state display cycle effect is performed. The production is being executed. In (I), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect of the changed after change is executed, and the ninth frame of the state display cycle effect is performed. The production is being executed.

In (J), the effect of the third frame of the hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect after the change is executed, and the state display cycle effect is the first frame. Return.

In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, the cycle before change is 4 frames and the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is 9 frames. That is, while one cycle of the state display cycle effect (that is, the effect in which one cycle is the longest among the cycle effects that are simultaneously executed) is executed, the pending cycle effect of the hold before the change (that is, simultaneously executed) A plurality of cycles of one of the cycle effects (the effect having the shortest one cycle) is executed.

As a result, before the completion of one cycle of the state display cycle effect, the player recognizes that the holding cycle effect of the hold before the change is a periodic effect, and thus one cycle of the state display cycle effect At the time point before the end, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold cycle effect of the hold before change, and then the player's attention can be shifted to the state display cycle effect.

Note that in the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than that of the cycle before change and the cycle after change, but the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than that of the cycle after change. It may be shorter or shorter than the pre-change cycle.

Since the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is shorter than the cycle after the change, the hold display after the change attracts more attention as compared with the state display, and thus, for example, the hold display with an extremely high degree of expectation (for example, When a big hit is confirmed and iridescent color is held), a strong uplifting feeling can be given to the player. Further, when the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is shorter than the cycle after the change, for example, when the specific zone effect and the pending change are executed as the prefetch effect as in the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275. By paying attention to the hold after the change, it is possible to make the player firmly recognize which change is the change in which the SP reach in the specific zone is executed.

Further, since the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is shorter than that of the cycle before change, the hold display before change attracts more attention than the state display, so that the player feels a sense of security due to the hold. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive feeling of tension in the specific zone.

Further, in FIGS. 274 and 275, the state display cycle effect and the hold cycle effect are displayed so as not to overlap with each other. By doing so, the recognition of both parties can be made clear. Further, the state display cycle effect and a part or all of the hold cycle effect may be overlapped. This is because by overlapping, both sides (the state display cycle effect and the holding cycle effect) can be recognized simply by paying attention to the overlapping portion. Although the decorative symbol cycle is not shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, when the state display cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are compared with each other, they can be overlapped or not overlapped.

Up to this point, the effects in which a plurality of cycle effects are simultaneously executed have been described, but it goes without saying that the cycle effects may include cycle effects other than the decorative symbol cycle effect, the holding cycle effect, and the state cycle effect.

Specifically, for example, the cycle effect includes a fourth symbol cycle effect. The fourth symbol is a symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 or another display device (for example, an LED display or the like). In addition, the fourth symbol is, for example, a special lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation that is being executed or has been most recently executed, and whether or not the special symbol variation is being executed, a symbol that suggests separately from the decorative symbol, For example, it is desirable that the displayed size is smaller than the decorative pattern.

For example, while the decorative design is changing, the fourth design is also changing. In the fourth symbol variation, for example, a fourth symbol (for example, a circle) indicating that the special lottery result is a win, and a fourth symbol (for example, a cross mark) indicating that the result is a win are alternately displayed 2 Repeat the cycle effect consisting of pieces (also called the fourth symbol cycle effect). Therefore, when the decorative symbol cycle effect is being executed, the fourth symbol cycle effect is also executed at the same time.

By executing the fourth symbol cycle effect, it is possible to attract attention to the fourth symbol that most directly shows the special lottery result, so that the interest of the player who emphasizes the special lottery result rather than the effect is improved. Further, the length of one cycle, the length of one cycle of the fourth symbol cycle effect is preferably shorter than the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect. With this, while attracting attention to the fourth symbol that most directly shows the special lottery result, it is possible to further attract attention to the decorative symbol that also functions as a production while showing the special lottery result, and the player , It is possible to surely recognize the special lottery result while enjoying the production.

[21. Multiple types of production design]
FIG. 276 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect using a plurality of types of effect symbols. The effect display device 1600 includes a decorative symbol display area 1611. In the decorative symbol display area 1611, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in the order of descending to the right. The decorative design functions as the first effect design.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol display area 1611 includes a plurality of second effect symbol display areas. In the example of FIG. 276, the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the second effect symbol display area 1612 arranged in the upper right part of the area in which the middle decoration symbol is displayed, and in the lower left part of the area in which the middle decoration symbol is displayed. And a second effect symbol display area 1612. Hereinafter, the second effect symbol displayed in the second effect symbol display area 1612 in the upper right part is also referred to as an upper right symbol, and the second effect symbol displayed in the lower left second effect symbol display area 1612 is also referred to as a lower left symbol.

The decorative design displayed in the decorative design display area 1611 is, as described above, the game ball B has passed through the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (these starting openings are hereinafter also referred to as the first passage opening). It fluctuates with that. The second effect symbol displayed in the second effect symbol display area 1612 changes when the game ball B passes through the second passage opening different from the above-described first passage opening. The second passage opening is a passage opening different from the passage opening (that is, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004) that triggers a change in the decorative pattern, and for example, a predetermined general winning opening 2001 (for example, The leftmost one of the general winning openings 2001) and the like. That is, even if the game ball B passes through the second passage opening, the variation of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 1611 does not start.

For example, when the game ball B passes through the second passage opening, the upper right symbol and the lower left symbol fluctuate, and stop after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The variation time of the second effect symbol may be a predetermined time, or may be determined according to a predetermined variation pattern, such as a special symbol variation time or a normal symbol variation time. Further, when the game ball B passes through the second passage opening during the change of the second effect symbol, as in the case of the special symbol change, the second effect symbol change may be suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit, or may be suspended. You don't have to.

FIG. 276 shows an example in which the second effect design variation is performed in a state where the decorative design variation is not performed. (A) is a state where both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed (that is, any symbol is in a stopped state). In (A), the effect of the first frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are the same as those of FIG. 266 (six decorative symbol cycle effects). (B) is also a state in which both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed, and the effect of the second frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed.

(C) is a state in which the game ball B has passed through the second passage port and the second effect symbol variation has started. In (C), the special symbol variation is not executed, and the effect of the third frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. Even during the period when the special symbol fluctuation is not executed, the second effect symbol fluctuation is executed, so that it can be seen to the player that some sort of lottery is being performed, so that the player is bored. There is no. Specifically, by designing the upper right symbol, the lower left symbol, and the central decorative symbol (middle decorative symbol) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 1611 to be on a straight line, three identical symbols are aligned ( It is an effect that makes you feel as if you were combining a pattern corresponding to a hit.

Note that in the example of FIG. 276, the second effect symbol variation is an effect for so-called liveliness, in which no benefit is given to the player even if any combination of symbols is stopped. That is, in the example of FIG. 276, only the lottery for determining the stop symbol of the second effect symbol variation is performed based on the entry of the game ball B into the second passage opening, but the upper right symbol and the lower left symbol The stop symbols are determined so that they do not become the same symbols. As described above, the second effect symbol variation is merely a lively effect, and therefore it is desirable not to inflate the player's expectations.

Therefore, it is desirable that the second effect design is displayed smaller than the decorative design showing the special lottery result. Further, it is desirable that the types of the second effect symbols are smaller than the types of the decorative symbols. For example, the decorative design includes 10 types of designs each including the numbers 0 to 9, and the second effect design includes 7 types of designs each including the numbers 1 to 7. Further, it is desirable that the second effect design does not include a character, unlike the decorative design, and is expressed only by numbers.

In addition, in order not to inflate the expectation to the player, the number of patterns of the variable effect of the second effect symbol is small (specifically, for example, the number of effect patterns of the decorative symbol is less than or equal to 1). It should be a pattern). As the effect of the one pattern, in each of the second effect symbol display areas 1612, the effect in which the second effect symbol changes in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 is a cyclic effect with one cycle. Is executed. It is desirable that the time of the one cycle is short (for example, shorter (about 0.5 seconds) than one cycle of other cycle effects (decorative design cycle effect or hold cycle effect). This is because the attention to the second effect design is suppressed as compared with the decorative design showing the special lottery result. When the second effect symbol is stopped, each of the second effect symbols in the second effect symbol display area 1612 is replaced with the determined stop symbol.

As for the decorative pattern indicating the special lottery result, for example, the display size and the display position are different during the normal fluctuation and during the SP reach effect execution. The second effect symbol display area 1612 does not overlap with the decorative symbol even if the display size and the display position of the decorative symbol are changed so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the decorative symbol indicating the special lottery result. It is desirable to be provided in a position.

Note that, as in the example of FIG. 276, the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed in one display device (effect display device 1600) or may be displayed in another display device. However, when the decorative design and the second effect design are displayed on different display devices, the display positions of the decorative design and the second effect design are close to each other (for example, in the visual field of the player who is paying attention to the decorative design, It is desirable that the distance is such that 2 effect patterns are included (for example, within 30 cm).

When the decorative design and the second effect design are stopped, the combination of the lower left design, the upper right design, and one decorative design (for example, a medium decorative design) is a special lottery result for opening the special winning opening. It is desirable not to be a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols that notify (for example, big hit and small hit). Specifically, for example, at the end of the big hit variation and the small hit variation, if the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are all set to stop at the same number, the decorative design and the second effect design During the stop, at least one of the lower left symbol, the upper right symbol, and the medium decorative symbol is stopped at a different number, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol is determined. If the lower left design, the upper right design, and the middle decorative design are all stopped at the same number at the end of the out variation, some benefit is not given even though the out variation has ended. This is because the player may be misunderstood. However, during the big hit change, the lower left symbol, the upper right symbol and the middle decorative symbol may be stopped with the same number.

FIG. 277 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect using a plurality of types of effect symbols. FIG. 277 shows an example in which the second effect symbol variation starts during the reach state of the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol variation continues even after the variation of the decorative symbol ends. (A) is a state where both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed (that is, any symbol is in a stopped state). In (B), the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the special symbol variation is started, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started. On the other hand, the second effect symbol variation is not executed.

In (C), the reach state of the decorative pattern has started. Further, in (C), the effect of the first frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are the same as those of FIG. 266 (six decorative symbol cycle effects). In (D), the reach state is continuing, and the effect of the two decorative decorative cycle effects is being performed. Further, in (D), the game ball B has passed through the second passage opening, and the second effect symbol variation has started. In (E), the special symbol variation ends, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the combination of the missing symbols. Moreover, in (E), the variation of the second effect symbol is continuing.

In (E), the combination of the decorative symbols falling out is stopped, and the player is shown that the special lottery result is out of alignment, but since the second effect design is still changing, some sort of lottery is still won. The player can be shown as if there is still a chance to play, and the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, as described above, it is desirable that the types of the second effect symbols are smaller than the types of the decorative symbols. As in (E), if the number of types of the second effect symbols is equal to or more than the number of types of the decorative symbols, it is difficult to win the second effect symbol even when the combination of the detachment of the decorative symbols is stopped. The player guesses (for example, because 10 types of decorative designs could not be won, the player may feel that it is more difficult to win 15 types of second effect designs), and improves the expectation. Because you cannot do it.

FIG. 278 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect using a plurality of types of effect symbols. FIG. 278 shows an example in which the second effect design variation starts in a state where all the decorative symbols are varying. (A) is a state where both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed (that is, any symbol is in a stopped state). In (B), the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the special symbol variation is started, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started. On the other hand, the second effect symbol variation is not executed.

In (C), the state in which all the decorative patterns are changing continues. Further, (C) is a state in which the game ball B has passed through the second passage port and the second effect symbol variation has started. Further, in (D), the reach state of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect of the first frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. Note that the effect content of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same as that of FIG. 266 (6 frame decorative symbol cycle effect). Further, in (D), the variation of the second effect symbol continues. In (E), the reach state is continuing, and the effect of the two decorative decorative cycle effects is being performed. Moreover, in (E), the variation of the second effect symbol is continuing.

As shown in (C), by changing all the decorative symbols and all the second effect symbols, the notification of the lottery result is the W line (the pattern consisting of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol). A combination line, and a line consisting of a pattern consisting of a lower left design, a middle decoration design, and an upper right design) can be made to be recognized by the player, and thus the expectation of the player can be improved. You can

In addition, in order to make the player recognize the W line in this way, both the case where the decorative design and the second effect design are displayed on the same display device and the case where they are displayed on another display device It is desirable that the arrangement of the two effect symbols is not parallel to the line consisting of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol.

[22. Replay production]
The replay effect will be described below. The replay effect is, for example, a notification that a high-expectation effect has been performed in a certain fluctuation, and then the high-expectation effect is re-executed during the fluctuation, resulting in a failure in the effect. It is a production that explains the points that have a great influence. 279, 280, and 281 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the replay effect. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. In (B), the decorative pattern is in the reach state.

(C) is a state in which SP reach has started. When SP reach starts, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left part, the middle upper part, and the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, respectively. The decorative symbol cycle effect is started from (C), and the decorative symbol cycle effect is continued during the SP reach execution. That is, the decorative symbol cycle effect continues until (G). The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are the same as those in FIG. 267 (four-character decorative symbol cycle effect).

In addition, in FIGS. 279(C) to (F), it seems that the decorative symbol cycle effect is progressing one frame at a time, but between (C) and (D), (D) and (E) The time periods between (E) and (F) and between (F) and (G) do not have to be one frame and may be longer than one frame.

Subsequently, in (D), the SP reach is continuing, and the display “Jaken...” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E), the display is deleted from the effect display device 1600. In (F), Janken's hand is displayed. In (F), the state in which the teammate character has lost the rock-paper-scissors game is displayed.

In (G), a display of "sorry..." indicating that the teammate character has lost to rock-paper-scissors, that is, the special lottery result is out of alignment (except when a revival effect is subsequently performed). It is displayed in 1600, and the decorative pattern of the combination that is out of order is stopped.

In (H), the display size and the display position of the decorative pattern of the combination of the deviations are returned to the original position (that is, the state before the start of SP reach), and the display of "sorry..." does not overlap with the decorative pattern. Have moved to. Note that in the example of FIG. 279, the size of the decorative design after the judge effect is the same as the size of the decorative design before SP reach, but smaller than the decorative design before SP reach, and more than the decorative design during SP reach. May be larger in size. In (H), the effect of the first frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. Note that another image (for example, a blackout image or the like) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 between (G) and (H).

In (I), the effect of the second frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J), the effect of the third frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (K), the effect of the fourth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (L), the decorative symbol cycle effect is finished, that is, the movement of the decorative symbol is completely stopped. In the examples of FIGS. 279 and 280, one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed after the judgment effect is completed and until the movement of the decorative symbol is completely stopped. However, the decorative symbol cycle effect of a plurality of cycles is performed. It may be executed.

The replay effect starts after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the stopped state of (L). Note that the replay effect is performed with the same variation as the variation in which the SP reach is executed. In (M), a display indicating that the replay effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N), the state of (B) is replayed, and the decorative pattern is in the reach state.

In (O), the state of (C) has been replayed, and SP reach has started. However, during replay of SP reach (that is, during a predetermined period after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the stopped state of (L)), it is assumed that the decorative pattern and the hold display are erased. Since the special lottery result about the fluctuation has already been notified, it is not necessary to display the decorative pattern, and by deleting the hold display as well, the player's consciousness is focused on the SP play reach replay production with high expectations. You can Note that, for example, for a player who wants to accurately confirm the replay effect of SP reach, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment may be possible during the replay effect.

In addition, in (O), unlike the state of (C), the display "The lines are black..." is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This indication suggests to the player that if the display color of the line saying "Janken game!" is a color other than black (for example, red), the degree of expectation is higher than when it is black. Display.

In (P), the state of (D) is being replayed, SP reach is continuing, and the display of “rock paper scissors...” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (Q), the state of (E) has been replayed, but unlike the state of (E), the display ““Press!” did not appear...” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. .. In the state (E), when the display prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, the degree of expectation is higher than that when the display prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is not displayed. This is a display that suggests to the player that it is even higher.

In (R), the effect display device 1600 displays a display urging the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed. The display is the same display as that displayed during the SP reach with high expectation. Furthermore, when a display prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a appears, a display indicating "It looks like this!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display urging the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a in (R) is not displayed in the SP reach actually performed before the replay effect, but introduces a display pattern with high expectation to the player. Is displayed in order.

The central pressing operation unit 303a is in the valid state in the state where the display prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, and when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in this state, the cutting as shown in (S) is performed. Inn is displayed. The cut-in is the same as the cut-in displayed during SP reach. Further, in the effective state, a display indicating that "there is such a cut-in when pressed" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The cut-in in (S) is not displayed in the SP reach actually performed before the replay effect, but is displayed in order to introduce the display pattern with high expectation to the player.

In (T), the state of (F) is replayed, and the state in which the teammate character has lost the rock-paper-scissors game is displayed. In (U), the state of (G) is replayed, the display of "sorry..." is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the decorative pattern of the combination of the discontinuance is stopped.

In (V), the state of (H) is replayed. Note that, as in (H), the decoration symbol is displayed in a large size after the judge effect and the replay effect in the state of returning to the original position is different from the SP reach, and the decorative symbol and the hold display are performed again on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. In (W), the state of (I) is replayed and the effect of the second frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

In (X), the state of (J) is replayed, and the effect of the third frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (Z), the state of (K) is replayed, and the effect of the fourth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In this way, in the replay effect, the state until just before the decorative pattern is completely stopped is replayed. Regarding the decorative symbol cycle effect after the judge effect, only less than 1 cycle (that is, 3 frames or less) may be replayed and the replay effect may be ended. This is because some players are less interested in the performance after the judge's performance.

In (Z), the decorative pattern is completely stopped, and after the completely stopped state has passed a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the fluctuation ends. The replay effect includes a state in which the decorative pattern is completely stopped, that is, (Z) can be considered as a replay effect in which the state of (L) is replayed. If the next variation is a variation pattern capable of executing the replay effect, the replay effect may be repeatedly displayed in the next variation.

[23. Hold cycle production and movable production]
FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which the hold cycle effect and the movable body effect are simultaneously executed. The hold cycle effect repeats the effect with four frames as one cycle. Since the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 282 is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the example of FIG. 282, when the hold cycle effect is being executed, a part of the hold display is hidden by the movable body (here, it is assumed to be the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310), that is, the movable body is Move to a position that overlaps with the hold display.

In (A), the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect is executed. Further, in (A), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located at the initial position (the position where the entire area of all the reserved displays can be visually recognized). In (B), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect is executed. Further, in (B), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves to a raised position (a position where at least a part of the pending display corresponding to at least one variation is hidden by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310). As a result, a part of the hold display (the entire area of the hold display corresponding to the change in execution) is hidden.

In (C), the effect of the third frame of the holding cycle effect is executed. Further, in (C), since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 remains at the raised position, a part of the hold display (the entire area of the hold display corresponding to the change being executed and the next change is supported). Some areas of the hold display are hidden).

In (D), the effect of the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect is executed. Further, in (D), since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 remains at the raised position, a part of the hold display (the entire area of the hold display corresponding to the change being executed and the next change is supported). The entire pending display area) is hidden.

In (E), the effect is returned to the effect of the first frame of the hold cycle effect. Further, in (E), since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has returned to the initial position, the entire area of all the pending displays can be visually recognized. In (F), the effect of the second frame of the hold cycle effect is executed. Further, in (F), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 remains in the initial position.

That is, as described above, in the example of FIG. 282, a part of the hold display is hidden by the upper back middle rotating decorative body 3310 being positioned above during the second to fourth frames of the hold cycle effect. ..

While the hold cycle effect is being executed, the hold display is hidden for a time shorter than one cycle of the hold cycle effect, so that the player visually recognizes the effect of the hidden frame (second to fourth frames in FIG. 282). Since this is not possible, the player tries to confirm the effect of the hidden frame in the subsequent cycles. Thereby, the attention of the player can be gathered on the hold display in the period of one cycle or more, and the player can be provided with a sense of security due to the hold.

Further, during execution of the hold cycle effect after executing the hold cycle effect for one cycle or more, the hold display is hidden for a time shorter than one cycle of the hold cycle effect, so that the effect of the hidden frame (2 in FIG. 282 is shown. Some players have the expectation that the (4th) frame may have been changed.

Further, in the example of FIG. 282, the movable body hides the hold display only once during execution of the hold cycle effect, but the hold display is hidden in a time shorter than one cycle of the hold cycle effect and the hold display is shown again. And may be repeated multiple times. In other words, the movable body is also in a state in which a cycle effect is performed in which one cycle is to move from the initial position to the raised position and return to the initial position again. As a result, the strobe effect can be realized in the holding cycle effect, and the player's expectation can be increased. However, in order to obtain a strobe effect remarkably, it is desirable that the time for showing the hold display in the repetition is short (for example, less than or equal to the time for hiding the hold display in the repetition).

In addition, the movable body may hide the hold display for a time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect. In particular, unlike the example of FIG. 282, when the entire area of all the hold displays is hidden, the hold cycle effect is hidden by the movable body for a long time, so that the movable body remains on the hold display for a while. When the movable body is no longer positioned on the hold display (that is, the entire area of all the hold displays can be visually recognized), it is assumed that the hidden hold cycle effect has been completed. Alternatively, the player may forget that the hold cycle effect was being executed in the first place. In such a situation, when the movable body is no longer positioned on the hold display and the hold cycle effect continues, the player may have a high expectation for the held change (( For example, it is possible that a hold change effect or the like may occur with respect to the hold, and a feeling of expectation can be held. Even when the movable body hides the hold display for a time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect, it is possible to hide the hold display and show the hold display again a plurality of times. You may repeat.

The movable body may hide the hold display at the same time as one cycle of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect. Since the hold display time hidden by the movable body and the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect are the same, one cycle of the hold cycle and the move effect of the movable body are synchronized. Therefore, the player can have a feeling of expectation by thinking that the holding cycle effect and the moving effect of the movable body are associated with each other.

Further, during execution of the hold cycle effect, the movable body may hide the hold display at the same time as N cycles (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the hold cycle effect. As a result, the effect when the hold display becomes visible again after the hold cycle effect is hidden is restarted from the continuation of the frame immediately before the hold cycle is hidden, so while hiding the hold display. Also, the player can be made to recognize the connection of one cycle of the holding cycle effect.

Also, during execution of the hold cycle effect, the movable body hides the hold display at the same time as the X cycle of the hold cycle effect (X is a non-integer larger than 0, for example, 1.5 cycles, 2.25 cycles, etc.). May be. In the example of FIG. 282, when the movable body hides the hold display at the same time as 1.5 cycles of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect, the player makes 1 cycle and 1 of the next cycle. The effects of the first and second frames cannot be visually recognized, and can be visually recognized from the effects of the third frame in the next cycle. Therefore, the player can have an expectation that the effects of the first frame and the second frame have been changed.

Further, as in the example of FIG. 282, by hiding a part of the hold display corresponding to a certain change (the hold display corresponding to the next change in (C)), the visible area of the hold display is changed. Although the content of the hold cycle effect has not changed, the player infers that the effect content has changed for the invisible area. That is, the player is very concerned about the hold display, and thus can draw attention to the hold display. Further, the player pays attention to the hold display, and the movable body that hides the hold display is also in the field of view, and as a result, the player can also draw attention to the moving effect of the movable body.

Also, as in the example of FIG. 282, by hiding the entire area of the hold display corresponding to a certain change (for example, the hold display corresponding to the change being executed in (B) to (D)), another change is displayed. Regarding the hold display, the player who recognizes that the hold cycle effect continues, the player may recognize that the hold cycle effect does not change, or the hold change does not occur. It is possible to infer that there is a sense of expectation.

Further, unlike the example of FIG. 282, all areas of all hold displays may be hidden during execution of the hold cycle effect. As a result, the player's consciousness completely goes to the moving effect of the movable body once, but even after the movable body is no longer positioned on the hold display (that is, the entire area of all the hold displays can be visually confirmed). When the hold display cycle effect continues, the player pays attention to the hold display again. That is, since the player's consciousness returns to the hold display from the movable body, it is possible to suppress an excessive expectation of the moving effect of the movable body and provide a sense of security due to the holding.

Further, the player may realize the above-mentioned holding peeping effect by hiding the holding display by the movable body during execution of the holding cycle effect. As a result, the player can have a great sense of expectation.

As described so far, the effect that the movable body hides the hold display during execution of the hold cycle effect can make the player have an expectation. Therefore, the effect is highly variable (for example, a predetermined value). Of the reach effect), or a change of executing the look-ahead effect with respect to the change of high expectation.

Note that in the example of FIG. 282, the movable body hides the hold display, but the hold display may be hidden by another effect image or the like. The other effect images include an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 with priority over the hold display (that is, on the front side), an image displayed by causing a predetermined light guide plate to emit light, and the like.

[24. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-and-back production unit 3100, a transparent guide is provided behind the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A light emitting plate 3113 and a back rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be housed therein. When a plurality of the first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear back decorative substrate 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a changes from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is emitted in the direction along the direction, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on the substantially entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Then, the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that form the decorative member, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative member having a light property (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated and decorated.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body is formed. Since 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are configured to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is irradiated with light toward the front. It is possible to lengthen the distance until the light is emitted forward, and it is possible to diffuse the light from the first LED 3114a widely and emit it forward from the light guide emission plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the light is emitted in a dot shape. The seat 3112 can be uniformly illuminated to make it look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, since the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat plate-shaped decoration members (the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the front-rear dimension is thin. It is possible to secure a space for arranging the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, and arrange other effect members (back-and-front front rotating decoration body 3410, back-and-back rotating decoration body 3440, etc.). It is also possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining by providing various effect members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (back movable movable body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a are provided, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the embellished portion 3150, and the embossed portion is embossed. A depth effect can be added to the design of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind by the lens effect. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decoration portion 3150) can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the ornamental body 3111 and the pattern of the ornamental sheet 3112, and thus the thickness of the back and rear movable ornamental body 3110 ( The decorative effect does not decrease even if the size (in the front-rear direction) is reduced, and it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 thinner. It is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having the relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, the decorative body 3111 can be made to appear colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. Can be made. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the ornamental body 3111 (back movable movable ornamental body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

In addition, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by the light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided. From the other LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the light by hitting the part of, the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the hologram can be strongly attracted to the player. This makes it possible to give a stereoscopic effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decoration body 3110, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the thinness even if the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is made thin.

Further, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by the hologram, the hologram is the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed portion such as 3111c, it is possible to give a feeling of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect of the embossed portion, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. The possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the hologram portion is provided on the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the design of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back-back movable decoration body 3110. In addition to being able to do so, the decoration can be made to look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 (the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112 or the like) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be sufficiently exerted, and the back-and-back movable decoration body can be exhibited. By the decoration of 3110, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player can be provided.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with (abutted against) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that the light between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 becomes light. Does not diffusely reflect, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exerted. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can reduce the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 and can realize the above-described effects.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111) by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is a decoration continuous with the decoration of the back-removable decoration 3110, so that a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It is possible to show the game, and to give the player a visual impact so that the player can pay attention to the player. In addition, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed from the rear side, the first LED housing of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is housed. By housing the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made as close to each other as possible, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 can be front and rear. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 exhibiting the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

Also, the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 houses the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the site and irradiating light from the inner surface thereof, the site can be made to emit light brightly, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet). 3112) can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is of the side-view type, it is only necessary to house the first LED 3114a in the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be emitted from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects is reliably realized. be able to.

In addition, since a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide/radiation plate 3113, light can be emitted to almost all of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily deal with the change in the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

The back and rear movable decorations 3160 and 3170 can also achieve the same effect as the above.

In addition, you may perform the lottery which gives a privilege to a player with a predetermined probability using the second effect symbol variation. In addition, the second passage opening is, for example, the rightmost one, the lowest one, or the first special winning opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2006, the gate portion 2003, or the general winning opening 2001, or It may be the one located at the top. When the benefit is won, the upper right symbol and the lower left symbol are stopped in a predetermined combination. The lottery includes, for example, a lottery for giving a predetermined number of game balls and a lottery for opening a winning opening different from the big winning opening. However, when a lottery for giving a predetermined number of game balls is performed, it is preferable that the predetermined number is smaller than that of the big hit and the small hit which has the smallest expected number of balls to be acquired. This is because the main lottery in the gaming machine is a special symbol lottery.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and to a gaming machine (parrot machine) in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the decoration portion 3150 of the back-back movable decoration body 3110, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, and the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 is shown. Not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be a single decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3100 Back rear effect unit 3110 Back rear movable decorative body (effect member)
3111 Decorative body (decorative member)
3111a First decorative protrusion (decoration, relief)
3111b Second decorative protrusion (decoration, relief)
3111c Third decorative protrusion (decoration, relief)
3111d Metal decoration (decoration)
3111e Rear concave portion 3111f Mounting boss 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member)
3112a First contour portion (decoration, hologram portion)
3112b Second contour portion (decoration)
3112c First light diffusion part (decoration)
3112d Second light diffuser (decoration)
3112e Transmission part 3113 Light guide radiation plate (radiation plate)
3113a Body part 3113c First LED housing part (LED housing part)
3113e Reflecting part 3113f Leg part 3114 Rear back decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3114a First LED (LED)
3150 Decorative section (decoration)
3160 Back decorative movable body 3161 Decorative body (decorative member)
3161c Metal decoration part (decoration)
3162 Decorative sheet (decorative member)
3163 Light guide radiation plate (radiation plate)
3163a LED accommodating portion 3163b Reflecting portion 3164 Back rear decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3164a LED
3170 Back decorative movable body 3171 Outer decorative body (decorative member)
3171c Metal decoration part (decoration)
3172 Interior decoration (decorative member)
3173 Light guide radiation plate (radiation plate)
3173a LED accommodating portion 3173b Reflecting portion 3174 Rear back decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3174a LED

Claims (1)

A lottery means for acquiring lottery information on winning based on the establishment of the start condition and executing a lottery based on the lottery information;
Variation of the decorative symbol is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the decorative symbol varying means for indicating the result of the lottery when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped,
There are a plurality of modes in the display effect in which the decorative pattern is periodically displayed with a predetermined time as one cycle,
In a specific period during the change of the decorative pattern, it is possible to execute any one of the display effects of the display effects having the plurality of modes,
The start condition is displayed after the variation of the decorative design is stopped by displaying a combination of the symbols that are not hit by the decorative design after performing the display production of any one of the display productions having the plurality of modes. It is possible to generate a special period in which the decorative pattern is hidden under the condition that does not satisfy, and the display effect having the plurality of modes again when the special period in which the decorative pattern is hidden is finished. It is possible to execute any of the display effects of
Wherein the executable special effect in the particular period decoration pattern are not displayed, and can perform some of the expectations produce different expectation effect for said per executing the variation of the decorative pattern,
After the combination of symbols that cannot be won is displayed and the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is hidden in the special period, and then the decorative symbol is hidden under the condition that the start condition is not satisfied. gaming machine, wherein said that the combination of decorative symbols are displayed the special period in which a does not become the per upon completion.

Images